JP7464971B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and can be applied in particular to pachinko gaming machines.

In conventional gaming machines, a hit/miss determination is made with a predetermined probability of hitting a jackpot based on the ball entering the starting hole, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. If the hit/miss determination results in a hit, the symbols are displayed as a jackpot symbol and the jackpot opening hole is opened, resulting in a jackpot game. In addition, game effects (reach effects, character effects, etc.) are executed in conjunction with the variable display of the symbols, and the execution mode of the game effects indicates the possibility that the hit/miss determination will result in a jackpot, i.e., the possibility that the symbols will be displayed as a jackpot symbol (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, there were multiple jackpots, some of which were relatively advantageous to the player, and some of which were relatively disadvantageous. In addition, there were multiple game presentations (reach presentations, character presentations, etc.) with different execution modes, and different jackpot reliability was indicated depending on the game presentation executed. This increased the player's gaming interest when a game presentation with a high jackpot reliability was executed, and further increased the player's gaming interest when an advantageous jackpot was achieved.

JP 10-57583 A

In gaming machines like those described above, when a game presentation with a high probability of winning is executed, it increases the player's interest in the game, but if the game presentation results in a jackpot that is relatively unfavorable to the player, there is a risk that this will lead to a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can execute gaming effects that enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

The first aspect of the invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a gaming machine comprising:
A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbol arrangements each composed of a plurality of symbols, and for stopping and displaying symbols selected from the plurality of symbol arrangements in a predetermined stopping manner;
and a bonus awarding means for awarding a predetermined bonus when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific stopping mode.
The pattern array includes a plurality of specific patterns, and the plurality of specific patterns indicate common information and have different display modes;
As the specific stop mode,
A first specific stop mode in which a stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols, and the specific symbols constituting the stop mode are composed of the specific symbols of the same display mode;
A second specific stop mode in which a stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols, and at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode is composed of the specific symbols in a display mode different from the display mode of the other specific symbols,
A different benefit is awarded when the first specific stop mode is stopped and when the second specific stop mode is stopped,
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A game performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined game performance,
The game presentation includes a first game presentation and a second game presentation that suggests a higher possibility that the result of the hit/miss determination will be a hit than the first game presentation,
A second specific symbol not included in the symbol array is provided,
At a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display of the symbols, the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol, and the second game performance is executed.
It is characterized by the above.

According to such a gaming machine, a stop mode is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and a plurality of symbol arrays are displayed variably in accordance with the number of symbols that constitute the stop mode. A plurality of specific symbols are included in one symbol array, and the plurality of specific symbols display common information, although at least a part of the display mode is different from each other. A predetermined benefit is awarded when the stop mode of the symbols becomes a specific stop mode, and the first specific stop mode is constituted by the symbols that constitute the stop mode with the same display mode, and the second specific stop mode is constituted by at least one of the symbols that constitute the stop mode with a different display mode from the others. Different benefits are awarded when the stop mode of the symbols becomes the first specific stop mode and when it becomes the second specific stop mode. As a result, if a plurality of specific symbols that exist in each symbol array become a specific stop mode, a benefit is awarded even if the display modes are different, so that the player feels that the possibility of receiving a benefit has increased, and increases his interest in the game. The game presentation includes a first game presentation and a second game presentation that suggests a higher probability of winning than the first game presentation. At a predetermined timing during the variable display, a specific symbol included in the symbol array changes to a second specific symbol that was not included in the symbol array, and the second game presentation is executed. This increases the probability of winning when the specific symbol changes to the second specific symbol, and increases the interest in the game. In addition, since the symbol array includes multiple specific symbols that can change to the second specific symbol, the expectation of the second game presentation being executed is increased, and the interest in the game is increased.

A second aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention,
A game performance execution means is provided for executing a predetermined game performance,
As the game presentation,
A first stop effect indicating whether the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the first specific stop mode;
A second stop effect indicating whether the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the second specific stop mode;
A continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode;
The present invention is characterized in that it has the following features.

According to such a gaming machine, the game effects include a first stop effect indicating whether a stop mode that can constitute a first specific stop mode will occur, a first stop effect indicating whether a stop mode that can constitute a second specific stop mode will occur, and a consecutive stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are executed in a predetermined order while maintaining at least one specific symbol. As a result, when the consecutive stop effect is executed, even if the stop mode that can constitute the first specific stop mode (or the second specific stop mode) that can grant a bonus is not reached, a performance is executed to determine whether a stop mode that can constitute a second specific stop mode (or the first specific stop mode) that can grant a bonus will occur, so that it is possible to maintain the expectation of a bonus for a long period of time.

The gaming machine of the present invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that executes gaming effects that enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing displays provided in the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. FIG. This is a table showing the correspondence between the type of win and the opening pattern of the large prize opening. 13 is a table showing various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal pattern hit determination table, and (E) is a normal pattern change pattern selection table. This is a fluctuation pattern table. 13 is a flowchart of a main control process. 13 is a flowchart of an interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. 13 is a flowchart of a general operation process. 13 is a flowchart of normal symbol waiting processing. This is a flowchart of the normal pattern correctness determination process. 13 is a flowchart of normal pattern random number shift processing. This is a flowchart of processing during normal pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of the normal symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of normal electric device processing. 13 is a flowchart of special chart operation processing. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 correct/incorrect determination process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 correct/incorrect determination process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. This is a flowchart of special electric device processing 1 (jackpot game). 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. This is a flowchart of special electric device processing 2 (small hit game). 13 is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 13 is a flowchart of a power interruption monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 13 is a flowchart of a reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. This is a flowchart of the process for starting the performance when the ball scores. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing. 13 is a flowchart of a setting process for preview effects, etc. 13 is a flowchart of a setting process for preview effects, etc. 13 is a flowchart of a process for executing a rehearsal performance, etc. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance end processing. 13 is a flowchart of a special game effect selection process. 13 is a flowchart of an ending effect selection process. 13 is a table showing a notice determination table for a low load state. 13 is a table showing a notice determination table for a high load state. 13 is a flowchart of a preview performance setting process in Example 2. 13 is a flowchart of a preview performance setting process in Example 2. 13 is a table showing a notice determination table for a high load state of the gaming machine according to Example 2. 13 is a flowchart of the special game effect selection process of Example 3. 13 is a flowchart of an ending effect selection process according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing in Example 4. 13 is a table showing a notice determination table for a high load state in another aspect 1. 13 is a table showing a notice determination table for a high load state in another aspect 2. A diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the performance patterns in Example 5. A figure showing an example of how the pattern arrangement of the performance patterns in Example 5 changes. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5. A figure showing an example of an execution mode of the game presentation of Example 5.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described using an example. In the following, an example will be described in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine that can execute a winning game that can award a player a predetermined amount of gaming profit (e.g., prize balls) when a winning pattern is displayed stationary as the display of changing patterns ends.

As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment comprises a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 attached within the game machine frame 50, and the game board 2 is configured to be freely attached and detached from the game machine frame 50. Figure 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 is configured to have a front frame 51 with a decorative surface, a main frame 52 to which the game board 2 etc. are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall, and the front frame 51, main frame 52 and outer frame 53 are pivotally supported at one side end and each is configured to be openable and closable.

The front frame 51 is also provided with a launch handle 60 for launching game balls with a launch strength according to the amount of operation (rotation angle) by the player, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 that can store game balls and supply them to the launching device, and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 that stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The front frame 51 is also provided with a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively referred to as the "effect button 63") that can be operated by the player during the execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. The multiple effect buttons can be used differently depending on the type of game effect. The front frame 51 is also provided with a decorative frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment 1, and may be anything that can detect input from the player, or may be an input detection means (e.g., a retractable type, touch sensor type, etc.) that allows the player to directly touch the button to input, or may be a non-contact input detection means (e.g., a photoelectric type) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body to input.

The game board 2 is surrounded by a rail member 4 to form a game area 3 where game balls launched by operating the launch handle 60 flow down. The game board 2 is also provided with a decorative board lamp 5. A number of game nails 16 that guide the game balls are protruding from the game area 3. A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, which can prevent the game balls once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device. An image display device 7 consisting of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with a performance pattern display area 7b (also called the "performance pattern display section") in which performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply called "performance pattern 8") are displayed, and the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in synchronization with the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern, which will be described later. The performance pattern display area 7b consists of three pattern display areas, for example, "left," "middle," and "right," with the left performance pattern 8L displayed in the left pattern display area, the middle performance pattern 8C displayed in the middle pattern display area, and the right performance pattern 8R displayed in the right pattern display area.

Each of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R consists of a number of symbols (identification information) that represent, for example, the numbers "1" through "9." The left, center, and right performance symbols stopped and displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b display the results of the first special symbol variation display displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a (also called the "first special symbol display section") (described below in FIG. 4) and the results of the second special symbol variation display displayed on the second special symbol display device 41b (also called the "second special symbol display section") (i.e., the results of the special symbol win/loss judgment (also simply called the "win/loss judgment")) in a way that is easy for the player to recognize. Note that the first special symbol, second special symbol, and performance symbol may also be referred to simply as "symbol," "identification information," or "identification symbol." For example, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, it is possible to stop and display the performance symbols with the same three digits such as "777" (also called "winning performance symbols").

In addition, in the case of a small win, it is possible to stop and display the performance pattern with a preset chance pattern such as "135" or a special pattern such as "3★3" (also called "small win performance pattern"). In addition, in the case of a miss, it is possible to stop and display the performance pattern with a variety of patterns (also called "miss performance pattern") in which at least one of the three patterns such as "637" or "373" is different. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the performance pattern that is stopped and displayed. In other words, the player does not generally directly grasp the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment by looking at the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 41a or the second special pattern display device 41b, but by looking at the performance pattern displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b. It is not necessary to set the positions of the left, center, and right pattern display areas separately, and the display areas of the left, center, and right performance patterns may each be the entire pattern display area (performance pattern display area 7b). In addition, the variable display of the performance symbols may be displayed, for example, by scrolling up and down, left and right, diagonally, etc. In addition, the control unit that controls the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the performance symbols, and the display unit that displays the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the performance symbols are also referred to as "identification information display unit."

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game performance using the performance pattern (performance pattern game performance) as described above, the winning game performance executed in response to a winning game and the demo performance for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition to the performance pattern game performance, the winning game performance, and the demo performance, in addition to the performance pattern such as numbers, performance images other than the performance pattern such as background images and character images are also displayed. In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a first performance hold display area 9c (first performance hold display section) that displays the first performance hold 9a according to the number of storage of the first special pattern hold described later, and a second performance hold display area 9d (second performance hold display section) that displays the second performance hold 9b according to the number of storage of the second special pattern hold described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect hold or the second effect hold, the number of first special chart holds stored in memory displayed on the first special chart hold display 43a (see FIG. 4) described below and the number of second special chart holds stored in memory displayed on the second special chart hold display 43b can be clearly shown to the player.

Near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center ornament 10 is provided so as to surround the performance pattern display area 7b. At the bottom of the center ornament 10, a stage section 11 is provided, which has a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll. A hollow warp section 12 is provided at the left side of the center ornament 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and receives game balls flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game balls from the warp exit, and guides them to the stage section 11. Game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage section 11 are more likely to enter the first starting hole 20 described below than game balls that are not guided to the stage section 11. Furthermore, at the top of the center ornament 10, a decorative member 13 is arranged, which has an electric member such as an LED (board lamp 5) that can be lit depending on the game status and is shaped like letters, figures, etc.

In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that can move with the game performance is provided at the top of the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, with the execution of a game performance with a relatively high probability of winning, the movable decorative member falls downward, covers the front of the display screen 7a, and most of it becomes visible. This increases the player's anticipation of winning. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 is provided, which has a non-variable first starting hole 20 that does not change the ease of entry of the game ball. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20, a random number for determining whether the special pattern has been hit or not is obtained, and when a predetermined condition is established, a hit/miss determination for the first special pattern (first special pattern hit/miss determination) is executed, and the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed stationary based on the result of the hit/miss determination.

Below the first starting hole 20, a variable winning device 22 (also called a "variable starting hole") is provided, which includes a variable second starting hole 21 in which the ease of entry of a game ball changes. Based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol has been hit is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is met, a win/loss determination of the second special symbol (win/loss determination of the second special symbol) is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed as a still image based on the result of the win/loss determination. The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, which opens and closes the second starting hole 21 by operating the movable member 23. This opening and closing operation allows the second starting hole 21 to change from a first state (closed state) to a second state (open state) in which the probability of the game ball being hit is higher than the first state. The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting hole solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In this embodiment 1, the second starting hole 21 allows game balls to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and does not allow game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Note that the second starting hole 21 does not have to be completely unable to allow game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, so long as it is more difficult for game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state.

To the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, a first large prize winning device 31 (also called the "first variable ball winning hole") equipped with a first large prize winning hole 30 is provided. The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped with an opening/closing member 32, and opens and closes the first large prize winning hole 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize winning hole solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first large prize winning hole 30 can receive game balls only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. In other words, the first variable ball winning hole 31 can be changed between a ball-entry-prohibited state (closed state) in which game balls cannot enter and a ball-entry-possible state (open state) in which game balls can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32.

In addition, above the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3 and at the lower right of the center decorative body 10, a second large prize opening device 36 (also called the "second variable ball opening") equipped with a second large prize opening 35 is provided. The second large prize opening device 36 is equipped with an opening/closing member (blade member) 37, and opens and closes the second large prize opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize opening solenoid 38 (see Figure 5). The second large prize opening 35 can accept game balls only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

That is, the second variable ball entry port 36 can be changed between a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) where game balls cannot enter and a ball entry permitted state (open state) where game balls can enter, by opening and closing the opening/closing member 37. The second large prize device 36 is formed with a specific area 39 through which a game ball that has entered the second large prize entry port 35 can pass. In this pachinko game machine 1, a high probability state, which will be described later, is generated based on the detection that a game ball that has entered the second large prize entry port 35 has passed through the specific area 39. In other words, the specific area 39 is a sure-win operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first large prize device 31.

In the right area of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which game balls can pass is provided. Random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit or miss are obtained based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 28, and when a predetermined condition is met, a normal pattern hit or miss determination is executed to determine whether the second start opening 21 should be opened or not, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner and is displayed as a stop based on the result of the normal pattern hit or miss determination. When a winning normal pattern is displayed as a stop, the second start opening 21 is opened. Furthermore, multiple general ball entrance openings 27 are provided at the bottom of the game area 3.

The game area 3, in which various ball entry ports are arranged, can be divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. A left hit is a hit that shoots a game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and a right hit is a hit that shoots a game ball so that it flows down the right game area 3B. In this pachinko game machine 1, when starting a game, a left hit is used to aim for the ball to enter the first start port 20. On the other hand, when a hit/miss judgment based on the ball entering the first start port 20 is made and the game state changes, a right hit is used to aim for the ball to enter the gate 28, the second start port 21, the first large winning port 30, and the second large winning port 35. When a game ball enters the first start gate, the second start gate, the first major prize gate, the second major prize gate, or the general ball gate, a predetermined number of game balls (also called "prize balls") are paid out from each ball gate.

As shown in Figs. 3 and 4, the main display 40 is disposed at the lower right of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) for displaying the first special symbol as a variable and a stationary symbol, a second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display section) for displaying the second special symbol as a variable and a stationary symbol, and a regular symbol display 42 (regular symbol display section) for displaying the regular symbol as a variable and a stationary symbol. The main display 40 also includes a first special symbol reserved display 43a for displaying the number of hit/miss judgment information (first special symbol reserved) stored for the first special symbol, a second special symbol reserved display 43b for displaying the number of hit/miss judgment information (second special symbol reserved) stored for the second special symbol, and a regular symbol reserved display 44 for displaying the number of reserved operation (regular symbol reserved) stored for the regular symbol display 42.

The main display 40 also includes a win indicator 48 that indicates that the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment or the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit, a round indicator 45 that indicates the number of rounds of the winning game that will be executed if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment or the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit, a game status indicator 46 that indicates that the probability fluctuation function is activated, and a launch direction indicator 47 that indicates the launch direction of the game ball, i.e., whether it should be hit to the right or left. The display of the various indicators included in the main display 40 is controlled by the main control unit, which will be described later.

The first special symbol is displayed when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20. The second special symbol is displayed when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21. In the following explanation, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are sometimes collectively referred to as special symbols. Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are sometimes collectively referred to as the special symbol display unit 41. Furthermore, the first special symbol reserve display device 43a and the second special symbol reserve display device 43b are sometimes collectively referred to as the special symbol reserve display unit 43.

In the special symbol display section 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed variably for a predetermined time, and then displayed still, and the result of the lottery (special symbol hit/miss judgment, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 is announced by the special symbol (stopped symbol) that is stopped. The special symbol that is stopped is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by the special symbol hit/miss judgment. If the stopped symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (i.e., if it is a jackpot symbol or a small jackpot symbol), a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) is played in which the first large prize hole 30 or the second large prize hole 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped. The opening patterns of the large prize holes (first large prize hole 30 and second large prize hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i-p" and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment. For example, if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is the first big hit (15R big hit), the three "ijn" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. If the result is the second big hit (2R big hit), the four "jnkl" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. If the result is a small hit, the four "mnop" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. If the result is a miss, the two "lo" LEDs can be turned on and the rest turned off. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a-h" and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment. The display mode is determined to be different depending on the result of the second special symbol determination, similar to the first special symbol display 41b. Also, before the special symbol is displayed, the special symbol is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the display mode can be, for example, a mode in which each LED lights up in a predetermined order so that light flows repeatedly from left to right.

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various information (also called "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether or not a special pattern has been drawn is acquired based on the ball entry, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special pattern reservation memory unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. In detail, if the ball enters the first starting hole 20, it is stored in the first special pattern reservation memory unit 85a as the first special pattern reservation, and if the ball enters the second starting hole 21, it is stored in the second special pattern reservation memory unit 85b as the second special pattern reservation. An upper limit is set for the number of special pattern reservations that can be stored in each special pattern reservation memory unit 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment 1 is four. These first special pattern reservation memory unit 85a and second special pattern reservation memory unit 85b are also called the "first acquired information storage means" and the "second acquired information storage means", respectively, and are also collectively called the "acquired information storage means".

The reserved special symbols stored in the reserved special symbols memory unit 85 are consumed when it becomes possible to display the special symbols based on the reserved special symbols. The consumption of reserved special symbols means judging the random numbers for determining whether the special symbols correspond to the reserved special symbols, and executing the display of the special symbols to show the result of the judgment. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine 1, even if the display of the special symbols based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the ball entering, that is, even if the display of the special symbols is being executed or a special game is being executed, the right to judge whether the special symbol is the right for the ball entering can be reserved up to a specified number.

The number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the first special drawing reserved indicator 43a and the second special drawing reserved indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special drawing reserved indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs, "u v", and displays the number of reserved first special drawings by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of reserved first special drawings. For example, when the number of reserved drawings is 0, the display mode can be "u□v□" (for example, □: off, ●: red light, ▲: green light) in which both LEDs are off, and when the number of reserved drawings is 1, the display mode can be "u□v●" in which the LED of u is off and the LED of v is lit in red. Also, when the number of reserved drawings is 2, the display mode can be "u●v□" in which the LED of u is lit in red and the LED of v is off. Also, when the number of reserved drawings is 3, the display mode can be "u●v●" in which both LEDs are lit in red.

When the reserved number is 4 (the maximum number), both LEDs can be lit in green, as in "u▲v▲". The second special chart reserved indicator 43b is composed of two "wx" LEDs, and displays the number of reserved second special charts by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of reserved second special charts. For example, when the reserved number is 0, the display shows both LEDs turned off, as in "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), and the reserved numbers 1 to 4 are also determined in the same way as the first special chart reserved indicator 43a.

The normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then stops displaying it. The normal symbol (stopped symbol) displayed in a stopped state notifies the player of the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment based on the game ball passing through the gate 28. The normal symbol displayed in a stopped state is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol hit/miss judgment. If the normal symbol displayed in a stopped state is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a winning normal symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal pattern display 42 is composed of two "st" LEDs, and displays the normal pattern according to the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment by the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the judgment result is a hit, a winning normal pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed as "s■t■" (for example, ■: lit, □: off). If the judgment result is a miss, a missing normal pattern with only the t LED lit is displayed as "s□t■". Note that the missing normal pattern is not a specific normal pattern. Before the normal pattern is displayed, a variable display of the normal pattern is executed for a predetermined fixed time, and the variable display state is, for example, a state in which both LEDs alternately light up and go out.

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also called "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is acquired based on the passage, and the acquired information is temporarily stored as a normal symbol reserve in a normal symbol reserve memory unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of normal symbol reserves that can be stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment 1 is set to four.

The reserved normal symbols stored in the reserved normal symbols memory unit 86 are consumed when it becomes possible to display the normal symbol variations based on the reserved normal symbols. Consumption of reserved normal symbols means judging the random number for judging whether the normal symbol is correct or not that corresponds to the reserved normal symbol, and executing the variable display of the normal symbol to show the result of the judgment. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine 1, even if the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, even if the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed or an auxiliary game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether the normal symbol is correct or not for the passage, up to a specified number.

The number of reserved regular maps is displayed on the reserved regular map indicator 44. Specifically, the reserved regular map indicator 44 is made up of two LEDs, "qr", and displays the number of reserved regular maps by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of reserved regular maps. For example, when the reserved number is 0, the display mode is "q□r□" (for example, □: off, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), with both LEDs off, and when the reserved number is 1, the display mode is "q□r●", with the q LED off and the r LED lit in red. The reserved numbers 2 to 4 are also determined in the same way as the first special map reserved indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 2 and 5. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 is equipped with a main control board 80 (also called the "main control unit" and "game control unit") that controls game profits such as special symbol hit/miss judgment, normal symbol hit/miss judgment, and game state transition, a sub-control board 90 (also called the "sub-control unit" and "performance control unit") that controls performances executed as the game progresses, a payout control board 110 (also called the "payout control unit") that controls the payout of game balls, and an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the performance pattern 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the performance display 102, the performance first special pattern reserve display 103a, and the performance second special pattern reserve display 103b, etc.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case that stores the main control board 80 is provided in the approximate center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above this main control board case is a storage case for the image control board, etc., that stores the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and above this storage case for the image control board, etc., is a sub-control board storage case that stores the sub-control board 90. Also, below and to the left of the main control board case is a payout control board case that stores the payout control board, and to the right of that is a power supply board case that stores the power supply board 109.

The main control board 80 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may also be external. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special pattern reservation memory section 85 (first special pattern reservation memory section 85a and second special pattern reservation memory section 85b) and regular pattern reservation memory section 86.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors connected are the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize port sensor 30a, the second large prize port sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, and the general ball entry port sensor 27a. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means."

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects game balls that have entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects game balls that have entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects game balls that have passed through the gate 28. The first large prize port sensor 30a is provided in the first large prize port 30 and detects game balls that have entered the first large prize port 30. The second large prize port sensor 35a is provided in the second large prize port 35 and detects game balls that have entered the second large prize port 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in a specific area 39 in the second large prize port 35 and detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 39. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 and detects game balls that enter the general ball entrance 27.

The solenoids connected include the second start port solenoid 24, the first large prize port solenoid 33, and the second large prize port solenoid 38. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable prize device 22. The first large prize port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36.

Furthermore, the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserve display 43a, the second special symbol reserve display 43b, the normal symbol reserve display 44, the round display 45, the game status display 46, the launch direction display 47, and the win display 48 are connected to the main control board 80. In other words, the display control of these main displays 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and loan balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and enabling ball lending based on information stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like), as well as to a launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also called the "launch control unit"). The launching device 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also called the "payout control microcomputer") that controls the payout of game balls from the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 to pay out prize balls or pay out loan balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 81 and signals from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. The paid-out game balls are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. Furthermore, when the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launching handle 60, and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the launching handle 60. The launching motor 113 is then controlled to launch the game ball with a strength that corresponds to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launch volume 115.

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (not shown, for example a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer 91 for controlling the presentation of the pachinko game machine 1 in accordance with a program (the "microcomputer for controlling presentation") mounted on it. The microcomputer 91 for controlling presentation includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling game presentation as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The microcomputer 91 for controlling presentation transmits and receives data to and from other boards via an input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the microcomputer 91 for controlling presentation. The ROM may also be external.

The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 causes the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 to control the display of the image display device 7, the performance display device 102, the performance first special pattern reserve display device 103a, and the performance second reserve display device 103b based on a command received from the main control board 80. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores image data such as still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns, reserve patterns, etc.) and background images. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the performance control microcomputer 91. Then, it executes display control based on the read image data.

The performance display 102 is made up of two LEDs, and performs a change display and a stop display in accordance with the change display and stop display of the performance pattern 8, and displays the stop display in a display mode that indicates the display result of the performance pattern 8 (the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment) by turning on/off the two LEDs or by combining colors. In addition, the performance first special pattern hold display 103a and the performance second hold display 103b are also made up of two LEDs. And, by turning on/off the two LEDs or by combining colors, the performance first special pattern hold display 103a is displayed and controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of reserved items as the number of reserved items displayed in the first performance hold display area 9c and the number of reserved items displayed in the first special pattern hold display 43a. In addition, the performance second special pattern hold display 103b is displayed and controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of reserved items as the number of reserved items displayed in the second performance hold display area 9d and the number of reserved items displayed in the second special pattern hold display 43b. This is because the character pattern is displayed on almost the entire display screen 7a (performance pattern display section), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated to cover almost the entire performance pattern display area 7b (performance pattern display section) of the display screen 7a, so that some or all of the performance pattern, first performance hold display section, or second performance hold display section may become invisible, and thus such a display device is provided. Note that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

The performance control microcomputer 91 also outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be implemented in the voice control board 106, in which case the CPU may be made to execute voice control. In this case, a ROM may be implemented in the voice control board 106, and sound data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may be made to execute voice control. In this case, sound data may also be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

In addition, based on the commands received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines the light pattern data (data that determines the on/off state and light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 from the data stored in the ROM, and controls the lighting of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The movable decorative member 14 is a so-called movable gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10, although only a part of it is visible in FIG. 1. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also called "drive data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operating mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and controls the operation of the movable decorative member 14 based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be implemented in the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may be made to execute the lighting control of the lamp and the operation control of the movable decorative member 14. In addition, in this case, a ROM may be implemented in the lamp control board 107, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The sub-control board 90 is also connected to a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second effect button detection switch 63d, which detect when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). Therefore, when the player performs a specified input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the hit/miss judgment in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 will be described. The results of the special symbol hit/miss judgment are "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". In the case of a "big hit", a "big hit symbol" is displayed in a static state on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of a "small hit", a "small hit symbol" is displayed in a static state on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of a "miss", a "miss symbol" is displayed in a static state on the special symbol display section 41. When a big hit or a small hit is judged, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. The special game executed when a big hit is obtained is called a "big hit game", and the special game executed when a small hit is obtained is called a "small hit game".

There are several types of wins. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of wins are "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "15R 2nd jackpot", "2R 3rd jackpot", and "15R 4th jackpot". "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 4th jackpot" are jackpots in which the number of times (number of rounds) the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) is opened 15 times, and in the first and second rounds, the second large prize opening 35 is opened in a manner that makes it possible (easy) for the game ball to pass through to the specific area 39. The rounds that aim to pass the game ball through this specific area 39 can be called chance rounds or challenge rounds. The "15R second jackpot" is a jackpot in which the number of times (number of rounds) the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) is opened 15 times, but the opening time in the first and second rounds, which are the chance rounds, is extremely short (opening and closing for a moment), making it difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to pass through to the specific area 39. In other words, this "15R second jackpot" can be said to be a jackpot that does not open the second large prize winning device 36 in a manner that allows (easy) the game ball to pass through to the specific area 39. The "2R third jackpot" is a jackpot in which the number of times (number of rounds) the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) is opened 2 times, and the second large prize winning device 36 is opened in a manner that allows the game ball to pass through to the specific area 39 in the first and second rounds, which are the chance rounds. However, the opening time of the second large prize opening 35 is 1.8 seconds in the first and second rounds combined, so the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area is lower than in the 15R first jackpot.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is transitioned to a high probability state, which will be described later, based on the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. Therefore, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss determination is the aforementioned 15R first jackpot, 2R third jackpot, or 15R fourth jackpot, the first and second chance rounds are executed in a state in which the probability of the game ball passing through the specific area is relatively high, so that the game state after the jackpot game can be transitioned to a high probability state by passing the game ball through the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game. In contrast, in the case of a 15R second jackpot, the opening times for the first and second chance rounds are each 0.1 seconds, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the second large prize opening, and therefore the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot game is highly likely to be the normal state (low probability state) described below (it can also be said to be in a low probability state).

On the other hand, a small win is a win that opens the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) in the same opening pattern as the 2R third big win. In other words, in a small win, the second large prize device 36 is opened in a manner that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. However, even if a game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of a small win game, the game state after the execution of the small win game is not changed from before the execution of the small win game. Therefore, if the game state before the execution of the small win game is a normal state (low probability state), the game state after the execution of the small win game will also be a normal state. And from the player's point of view, the above-mentioned 2R third big win and a small win cannot be distinguished even by looking at the opening pattern of the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35). In other words, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a 2R third big win or a small win. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during a special game as a 2R 3rd jackpot, it is difficult to recognize whether the game state has transitioned to a high probability state. Also, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during a special game as a small jackpot, it is difficult to recognize whether the game state has remained normal or transitioned to a high probability state. As a result, in the case of a small jackpot or a 2R 3rd jackpot, the game can be played with the expectation that the game may be in a high probability state, which can increase the interest in the game. Note that in the case of a small jackpot, the number of times the large prize opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of openings.

More specifically, the opening pattern of the large prize opening when each large prize and small prize occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 is as shown in FIG. 6. That is, in the case of the 15R first large prize (when the 15R first large prize symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and the 15R fourth large prize (when the 15R fourth large prize symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 41b), the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from the 1st round to the 2nd round, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from the 3rd round to the 15th round. In this case, the opening time of the second large prize opening 35 in the 1st round and the 2nd round is 28 seconds each, so that it is easy to pass the game ball into the specific area 39 during that round.

In addition, in the event of a 15R second jackpot (when the 15R second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds from the 1st round to the 2nd round, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from the 3rd round to the 15th round. In this case, the opening time of the second large prize opening 35 in the 1st round and the 2nd round is a maximum of 0.1 seconds each, which is extremely short (it opens and closes for just a moment), so it is nearly impossible to pass the game ball into the specific area 39 during that round.

That is, the opening pattern for the 15R second jackpot has different opening patterns for the first and second rounds compared to the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot. In other words, in the 15R first jackpot, the second large prize winning hole 35 opens for 28 seconds in the first and second rounds, so the game ball easily enters the second large prize winning hole 35. And the game ball that enters the second large prize winning hole 35 has a high probability of passing through the specific area 39. In contrast, in the 15R second jackpot, the second large prize winning hole 35 opens for only 0.1 seconds in the first and second rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for the game ball to enter the second large prize winning hole 35. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the 15R second jackpot is much lower than that of the 15R first jackpot. Also, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is close to zero, so it can be said that it does not pass through.

As shown in FIG. 6, when the 2R 3rd jackpot is won (when the 2R 3rd jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display 41a), the second large prize winning hole 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.9 seconds from the 1R to the 2R. In this case, the opening time of the second large prize winning hole 35 in the 1R and 2R is a total of 1.8 seconds, so it is possible to pass the game ball into the specific area 39 during that round. In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, one game ball is shot in about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the second large prize winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds, it is fully possible to make the game ball enter the second large prize winning hole 35. In addition, since the total opening time of the second large prize winning hole is short at 1.8 seconds, this 2R 3rd jackpot does not offer many prize balls (game profits) like other 15R jackpots. In other words, compared to other jackpots, it is a jackpot in which very few winning balls are awarded.

In addition, in the case of the first small win (when the first small win pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display 41a) and in the case of the second small win (when the second small win pattern is stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 41b), the second large prize winning hole 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the large prize winning hole is opened in the same opening pattern as the 2R 3rd big win. Even in this small win, the opening time of the second large prize winning hole 35 is a total of 1.8 seconds, so it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39. However, as mentioned above, even if the ball passes through the specific area 39, there is no change in the game state before and after the small win game. In addition, since the total opening time of the large prize winning hole is short at 1.8 seconds, it is not possible to expect many prize balls in this small win, as in the 2R 3rd big win. In other words, a small win provides almost no benefits to the player in terms of either a transition in the game state or winning balls (only winning balls from entering the jackpot).
That is, in this embodiment, the opening patterns of the second large winning hole 35 may include a first opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (easy to pass through) (15 first jackpot, 15R fourth jackpot), a second opening pattern in which the game ball has difficulty passing through the specific area 39 (15R second jackpot), and a third opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area but has a lower probability of passing through than the first opening pattern (2R third jackpot). In addition, as an opening pattern for a small win, a fourth opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 but does not give a bonus even if it does pass through (does not generate a high probability state) may be included. This fourth opening pattern may also be an opening pattern in which the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 39 as another embodiment.

The distribution probability for each jackpot in the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 40% for the 15R 1st jackpot, 50% for the 15R 2nd jackpot, and 10% for the 2R 3rd jackpot. In contrast, the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is always the 15R 4th jackpot. In other words, if a hit is determined based on the ball entering the second starting hole 21, which has become easier to enter due to the operation of the opening extension function described below (occurrence of a high base state), it will always be the 15R 4th jackpot. In this way, in this pachinko game machine 1, it is set so that it is more likely for the player to win the hit/miss judgment (lottery for the jackpot of the second special symbol) performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21 than to win the hit/miss judgment (lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol) performed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20. That is, players play in the hope of hitting the ball into the second starting hole 21. This is particularly noticeable when the opening extension function is in operation, which increases the frequency of hitting the ball into the second starting hole 21.

Here, in this pachinko game machine 1, the determination of whether it is a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss is made based on the "special symbol hit/miss determination random number (also called "hit/miss determination information")", and the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot is determined based on the "jackpot type determination random number (also called "symbol determination random number" or "symbol determination information"). As shown in FIG. 7(A), the special symbol hit/miss determination random number has a value in the range of 0 to 629. The jackpot type determination random number has a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (obtained information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 include the special symbol hit/miss determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number, as well as the "reach random number (also called "reach information")" and the "variable pattern random number (also called "variable pattern information").

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not a reach will occur in a game presentation (presentation pattern game presentation) that uses presentation patterns to show the result of a special pattern hit/miss judgment. A reach refers to a state in which, for example, the two presentation patterns 8R and 8L on the left and right stop (temporarily stop) with the same pattern, and the remaining center presentation pattern 8C is changing (a "7↓7" state). If the changing center presentation pattern 8C stops with the same pattern as the stopped presentation patterns 8R and 8L, the three presentation patterns will stop with the same pattern, resulting in a hit. Note that the stop (temporarily stop) of the presentation patterns in this case also includes a display that appears to be shaking slightly within the presentation pattern display area 7b (swinging and changing). This reach random number can take a value in the range of 0 to 126.

The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number has a value in the range of 0 to 198. The random numbers obtained based on the passage of the gate 28 include a random number for determining whether or not the normal pattern has been selected, as shown in FIG. 7(B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal pattern has been selected is a random number for determining whether or not to play the auxiliary game that opens the second starting hole 21 (normal pattern lottery). The normal pattern random number has a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states by combinations in which the probability fluctuation function for the special and normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening extension function are in an activated or deactivated state. The state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called the "high probability state", and the state in which it is not activated is called the "normal state (also called the "low probability state"). In the high probability state, the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the special symbol hit/miss judgment is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the hit/miss judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the normal state, but in the high probability state, the hit/miss judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the high probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit/miss judgment random number that is determined as a jackpot is large (see FIG. 8 (A)). In other words, when the probability fluctuation function for the special symbols is activated, the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols will be a jackpot (the stopped symbol will be a jackpot symbol) increases compared to when it is not activated.

The state in which the time-saving function is activated for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called the "time-saving state," and the state in which it is not activated is called the "non-time-saving state." In the time-saving state, the average value of the special symbol's time of fluctuation (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the final display) is shorter than the average value of the special symbol's time of fluctuation in the non-time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table that is set so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state (see Figure 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of consumption of the reserved special symbols is faster, and effective balls entering the starting hole (balls that can be stored as reserved special symbols) are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a jackpot while playing smoothly.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate. The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbols operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbols. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbols operate in the time shortening state of the special symbols, and do not operate in the non-time shortening state. Therefore, in the time shortening state, the probability of a win in the normal symbol hit/miss judgment is higher than in the non-time shortening state. That is, the normal symbol hit/miss judgment (normal symbol judgment) is performed using a normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is judged to be a hit is greater than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time shortening state (see FIG. 8 (D)). In other words, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 operates, the probability that the result of the normal symbol variable display will be a hit (the stopped symbol will be a normal hit symbol) is higher than when it is not operating.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the normal pattern change time is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment 1, the normal pattern change time is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but 1 second in the time-saving state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the second start hole 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the second start hole 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment in the non-time-saving state is a hit, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs one opening operation for 0.2 seconds, and the second start hole is in an open state during that period. Furthermore, when the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment in the time-saving state is a hit, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs three opening operations for 2.0 seconds.

When the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, as well as the opening time extension function and opening count increase function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, the second starting hole 21 opens more frequently and game balls enter the second starting hole 21 more frequently than when these functions are not operating (also called a "high frequency state"). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is called a "high base state", and the state in which they are not operating is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have in your hand.

The high base state (high frequency state) does not necessarily require all of the above functions to be activated. In other words, the activation of at least one of the probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening count increase function of the variable winning device 22, must make the second starting hole more likely to open (higher ball entry frequency) than when the function is not activated. Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without being associated with the time reduction state for special symbols. The function that generates such a high base state can also be called the "high base generation function."

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1, the game state after the special game in the event of a 15R first jackpot is a high probability state of the special symbol, a time-saving state of the special symbol, and a high base state if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly called the "high probability, high base state." The high probability, high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or when a jackpot is hit and a jackpot game is executed.

In addition, in the event of a 15R second jackpot, the game state after the special game will be the normal state of the special symbol, the time-saving state of the special symbol, and the high base state, since it is extremely difficult to pass through the specific area 39 during that special game (see Figure 6). This game state is specifically called the "low probability high base state." The low probability high base state ends when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner a predetermined number of times (e.g. 100 times), or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the specific area 39 is passed, the "high probability high base state" will be entered.

In addition, in the normal state (low probability low base state), if a 2R third jackpot occurs, the game state after the special game will be a high probability state of the special symbol, a non-time-saving state of the special symbol, and a low base state if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game (see Figure 6). This game state is specifically called the "high probability low base state." The high probability low base state ends when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner a predetermined number of times, or when a jackpot occurs and a jackpot game is played.

This high-probability, low-base state is a state in which the high-probability state is hidden, i.e., it is a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is a high-probability state. In other words, the high-probability, low-base state is what is known as a "latent high-probability state (also called a "probability non-announcement state"). In contrast, the above-mentioned high-probability, high-base state is a state in which it is clear to the player that it is a high-probability state. In other words, the high-probability, high-base state is what is known as a "high-probability game state."

In addition, in the high base state, if a 2R third jackpot occurs, the game state after the special game will be a high probability state for the special symbol, a time-saving state for the special symbol, and a high base state if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game (see Figure 6). In other words, the time-saving function for the special symbol and the base state will be the same as the state before the special game was executed.

When playing pachinko game machine 1 for the first time, the game state after powering on is the normal state with special symbols, the non-time-saving state with special symbols, and the low base state. This game state is specifically called the "low probability low base state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is more advantageous to play by hitting the ball to the right to enter the right play area 3B. Also, in a high base state, the second start hole 21 is more easily opened than in a low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20. Therefore, the ball is hit to the right to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which is the trigger for determining whether the normal pattern is correct or not. This allows more start balls to be entered (opportunities to determine whether the special pattern is correct or not) than if the ball is hit to the left. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is controlled to light in a predetermined manner, and notifies the player that the ball should be launched into the right play area.

In contrast, in low base states such as a high-probability low base state or a low-probability low base state, it is more advantageous to play by hitting the ball from the left to enter the left play area 3A. Also, in a low base state, the second start hole 21 is less likely to open than in a high base state, making it easier to get the ball to enter the first start hole 20 than the second start hole 21. For this reason, the ball is hit from the left to get the ball to enter the first start hole 20. This allows for more start balls (opportunities to determine whether the special symbol has been hit) than hitting from the right. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, and notifies the player that the ball should be launched into the left play area.

Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs, "yz", and indicates the launch direction by lighting the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in a low base state, it can notify that the ball should be launched into the left game area by displaying "y□z□" (e.g., □: off, ■: on) with both LEDs off. In a high base state, it can notify that the ball should be launched into the right game area by displaying "y■z■" (e.g., □: off, ■: on).

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to Figs. 10 to 38. The counter, flag, status, buffer, etc., which appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81, are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in Fig. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. As shown in the figure, the main control main processing first performs initial settings (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, various flags, statuses, and counters are reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", i.e. "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial settings (S101) are performed only once after the power supply is turned on, and are not performed thereafter. In addition, in Example 1 and the drawings, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as the "ordinary pattern", the special pattern may be referred to as the "special pattern", the first special pattern may be referred to as the "special pattern 1" or "first special pattern", and the second special pattern may be referred to as the "special pattern 2" or "second special pattern".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by incrementing them by 1. When the value of each random number counter reaches its upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", and may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter values are stored sequentially in a specified update value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of, for example, 4 ms. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU when the interrupt is prohibited, the interrupt process (S105) does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is permitted (S104).

[Interrupt handling]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), first, the output process (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), the commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub-control board 90 and the payout control board 110. The commands output here include information on the game state, the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment, the pattern as the big hit type, the variation pattern, and the like. The command is, for example, made up of 2 bytes of information. The upper byte is information on the type of command, and the lower byte is information on the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), the detection signals detected by the various sensors (first start hole sensor 20a, second start hole sensor 21a, first large prize hole sensor 30a, second large prize hole sensor 35a, general ball hole sensor 27a, etc. (see Figure 5)) attached to the pachinko game machine 1 are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. In addition, a detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects whether the lower tray 62 is full is also taken in, and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data.

The normal and special symbol main random number update process (S203) that is performed next is the same as the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) that is performed in the main control main process of Figure 10. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in Figure 7 is performed both during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and during other periods (the period from the end of the interrupt process (S105) until the start of the next interrupt process (S105)).

Following the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), normal symbol operation process (S205), special symbol operation process (S206), specific area sensor detection process (S207), reserved ball count process (S208), and power cut monitoring process (S209) are executed. After that, other processes not closely related to the present invention (S210) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is terminated. Then, the main control main process S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10) until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, and when the interrupt pulse is input (about 4 msec later), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
12, in the start gate sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls with normal symbols (the number of reserved normal symbols, specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved normal symbols provided in the RAM) is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), it proceeds to S305.

If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is four or more (YES in S302), proceed to S305. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is not four or more (NO in S302), add "1" to the number of reserved balls for normal symbols (S303), and perform the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304). In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been selected (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7 (B)) stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired, and the acquired random number value (acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for normal symbols in the normal symbol reserved memory section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 21, i.e., whether a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a (S305). If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. However, if a game ball has entered the second start hole 21 (YES in S305), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 (the number of reserved second special charts, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached 4 (the upper limit) (S306). Then, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 has reached 4 (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. However, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 (S307).

Next, the special pattern 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special pattern 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special pattern has been hit (label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the type of big win (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM are acquired (i.e., the random number values shown in FIG. 7(A) are acquired), and these acquired random number values (acquired information) are stored in the address space of the second special pattern reserved memory unit 85b according to the current number of reserved balls for special pattern 2.

Next, in the start hole sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start hole 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a (S309). If a game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 (NO in S309), the process is terminated. However, if a game ball has entered the first start hole 20 (YES in S309), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (the number of reserved first special charts, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached 4 (the upper limit) (S310). Then, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process is terminated. However, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (S311).

Next, the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), similar to the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special pattern hit/miss determination counter (label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM are acquired (i.e., the random number values shown in FIG. 7(A) are acquired), and these acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special chart 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit 85a.

[General Action Processing]
After the start port sensor detection process (S204), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal symbol operation process (S205) shown in Fig. 13. In the normal symbol operation process (S205), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and each stage is assigned a "normal symbol operation status 1, 2, 3, 4". If the "normal map operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), normal pattern waiting processing (S402) is performed; if the "normal map operation status" is "2" (NO in S401, YES in S403), normal pattern changing processing (S404) is performed; if the "normal map operation status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), normal pattern determination processing (S406) is performed; if the "normal map operation status" is "4" (NO in all S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. Note that the normal map operation status is initially set to "1".

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal symbol waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit/miss judgment process described later is performed (S502). In addition, after the normal symbol hit/miss judgment process (S502), the normal symbol change pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol change pattern selection process, by referring to the normal symbol change pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (E), if the game state is in the time-saving state, the normal symbol change pattern with a normal symbol change time of 1 second is selected. On the other hand, if the game state is in the non-time-saving state, the normal symbol change pattern with a normal symbol change time of 30 seconds is selected. In addition, after the normal symbol change pattern selection process, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed. In addition, following the normal pattern random number shift process (S504), the normal pattern variation start process is performed (S505) and the process is terminated. In the normal pattern variation start process, the normal pattern variation display is started in the normal pattern variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In addition, in the normal pattern variation start process, a normal pattern variation start command is set to inform the sub-control board 90 of the start of the normal pattern variation.

[Normal pattern correctness determination process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol hit/miss judgment process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit is read (S601). Next, it is judged whether the time-saving flag is ON (i.e., whether the game state is in the time-saving state or not) (S602). In S602, if it is judged that the time-saving flag is ON, that is, that the game state is in the time-saving state (YES in S602), it is judged whether or not there is a hit by the high probability normal symbol hit/miss judgment based on the table for the time-saving state (hit judgment value is "0" to "239") of the normal symbol hit judgment table shown in FIG. 8 (D) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. In other words, it is judged whether or not the value of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment random number counter (label-TRND-H) read out matches any of the hit judgment values. On the other hand, in S602, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is not ON, i.e., the game is not in the time-saving state (NO in S602), then a low-probability normal symbol hit determination is made based on the table for the non-time-saving state (hit determination values are "0" and "1") in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in Figure 8 (D) to determine whether or not there is a hit (S603), and processing proceeds to S605.
Then, in S605, it is determined whether the result of the normal winning/losing judgment (S603, S604) is a winning (normal winning) or not (S605), and if it is determined to be a losing (NO in S605), the losing normal pattern (normal losing pattern) to be displayed is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a winning (normal winning) in S605 (YES in S605), the winning normal pattern (normal winning pattern) to be displayed is determined (S607), the normal winning flag is turned ON (S608), and the process ends.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Following the normal pattern variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal pattern random number shift process (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal pattern random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal pattern reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each normal pattern reserved in the normal pattern reserved memory unit is shifted one position from the current position to the side to be read (S702). Then, the address space which is the storage location of the top reserved memory in the normal pattern reserved memory unit is made empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal pattern reserved is cleared to 0 (S703), and the process is completed. In this way, the normal pattern reserved is consumed in the reserved order.

[Normal pattern change processing]
As shown in Fig. 17, in the normal pattern variation process (S404), first, it is determined whether the normal pattern variation time has elapsed (S801), and if it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it has elapsed (YES in S801), a normal pattern variation stop command is set (S802) and the normal pattern operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, other processes such as stopping the normal pattern variation display with the display result (won normal pattern or lost normal pattern) according to the result of the random number for normal pattern hit/miss judgment are performed (S804), and this process is terminated.

[Normal design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal pattern determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether the normal pattern hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal pattern hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the normal pattern hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is then determined whether the time-saving flag is ON, that is, whether the time-saving state is in progress (S902). If the time-saving state is in progress (YES in S902), the opening pattern during the time-saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern during the time-saving state is an opening pattern in which a 2.0-second opening is repeated three times. Therefore, the second starting hole opening counter, which counts the number of times the second starting hole 21 is opened, is set to "3".

On the other hand, if the game is not in the time-saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern during the non-time-saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) (S906). As mentioned above, the opening pattern during the non-time-saving state is an opening pattern in which a 0.2-second opening is performed once. Therefore, the second starting hole opening counter is set to "1". Then, following the setting of the opening pattern (S903, S906), the normal operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in Fig. 19, in the normal electric accessory process (S407), first, it is determined whether the normal winning end flag is ON (S1001). The normal winning end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of the second starting hole 21 has ended in the auxiliary game that was executed as a winning one.

If the normal hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether the second start port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003). If it is not (NO in S1003), the process is terminated. If it is, the second start port 21 is opened (S1004) and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start port 21 is open (YES in S1002), it is determined whether it is time to close the second start port 21 (i.e., whether a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the second start port 21 was opened) (S1005). If it is not (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. If it is (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed) (S1006).

Following the closing process of the second start hole 21 (S1006), the value of the second start hole opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether the value of the second start hole opening counter is "0" or not (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends to open the second start hole 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the normal win end process is performed to end the auxiliary play (S1009), and the normal win end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. Note that the second start hole opening counter becomes "0" when the second start hole 21 is opened (the movable member 23 is opened) three times during the time-saving state, and becomes "0" when the second start hole 21 is opened once during the non-time-saving state.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol win end flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 has ended for the number of times set in S903 or S906, so the normal symbol win end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal symbol win flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal symbol operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol wait process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (Figure 13).

[Special diagram operation processing]
As shown in Fig. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol operation processing (S206) following normal symbol operation processing (S205). In the special symbol operation processing (S206), as shown in Fig. 20, the processing related to the special symbol display device 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and "special symbol operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. Then, if the "special symbol operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol waiting processing (S1102) is performed. If the "special symbol operation status" is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), special symbol changing processing (S1104) is performed. If the "special symbol operation status" is "3" (NO in S1101, S1103, YES in S1105), special symbol determination processing (S1106) is performed. If the "special symbol operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric device processing 1 (S1108) for a big win game is performed. If the "special symbol operation status" is "5" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, S1107), special electric device processing 2 (S1109) for a small win game is performed. In addition, the special chart operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol waiting process (S1102), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 21 (i.e., the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2) is "0" (S1201). If the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the second starting hole 21, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 20 (i.e., the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1) is "0" (S1206). Then, if the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting hole 20, it is determined whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed to be a standby screen (a demo screen for waiting for customers is being executed) (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process is terminated, and if not (NO in S1211), a standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

If the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is not "0" in S1201 (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more memories of random number counter values obtained due to a ball entering the second starting hole 21, the Special Chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202), Special Chart 2 change pattern selection process (S1203), Special Chart 2 random number shift process (S1204), and Special Chart 2 change start process (S1205) described below are performed in this order. In addition, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value related to the second starting hole 21 but there is one or more memories of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting hole 20, the special chart 1 hit/miss judgment process (S1207), the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), the special chart 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special chart 1 variation start process (S1210) described later are performed in this order. Thus, in this embodiment 1, the variation display of the first special pattern based on the first special pattern reservation is performed only when the second special pattern reservation is "0" (YES in S1201). In other words, the consumption of the second special pattern reservation (the variation display of the second special pattern) is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special pattern reservation (the variation display of the first special pattern). In this embodiment 1, a win/loss determination based on the reserved second special chart is more likely to result in a jackpot that is more profitable for the player than a win/loss determination based on the reserved first special chart (Figure 8 (B)).

[Special diagram 2 pass/fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol 2 hit/miss judgment process (S1202), first, the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol hit/miss is selected (the oldest memory) stored in the lowest area (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the second special symbol reserves) of the second special symbol reserve memory unit 85b of the RAM is read as a judgment value (S1301). Next, it is judged whether or not the probability flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is high probability (S1302). Then, if the state is not high probability (NO in S1302), that is, if the state is normal, a hit/miss judgment is made based on the hit judgment table for normal state (the hit judgment value is "3" and "397") in the hit judgment table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1303). On the other hand, if the state is high probability (YES in S1302), a hit/miss judgment is made based on the hit judgment table for high probability state in the hit judgment table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1307). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3,""53,""113,""173,""227,""281,""337,""397,""449," and "503."

If the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1309) is determined to be a "jackpot" (YES in S1304), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1310), the jackpot pattern is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1312), and the process ends. In addition, in the case of a hit/miss determination related to the first special pattern, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special pattern, and in the case of a hit/miss determination related to the second special pattern, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the second special pattern. In addition, if the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is judged to be a jackpot, one of the following will be executed: 15R 1st jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot, or 2R 3rd jackpot. In addition, if the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is judged to be a jackpot, all will be 15R 4th jackpot (Figure 8 (B)).

The jackpot flag includes a long jackpot flag that is ON when the jackpot type is 15R 1st jackpot or 15R 2nd jackpot, and a short jackpot flag that is ON when the jackpot type is 2R 3rd jackpot. Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 2R lamp and a 15R lamp, and when the 2R 3rd jackpot occurs and the short jackpot flag is ON, the 2R lamp is lit at the timing when the 2R 3rd jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is "2R▲15R△" (for example, ▲: lit, △: unlit). Also, when the 15R 1st jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot, or 15R 4th jackpot occurs and the long jackpot flag is ON, the 15R lamp is lit at the timing when the corresponding jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is "2R△15R▲".

On the other hand, if the result of the big win judgment (S1303, S1307) is not a "big win" (NO in S1304), it is judged whether or not it is a small win (S1305). That is, it is judged whether or not the value of the random number counter for judging whether or not the special symbol is a hit (label-TRND-A) matches any of the small win judgment values "101" to "105" (FIG. 8 (A)). Then, if it is judged that it is not a small win (NO in S1305), the losing symbol is determined (S1308) and the process ends. If it is judged that it is a small win (YES in S1305), the small win symbol is determined (S1306), the small win flag is turned ON (S1306), and the process ends. Note that the random number for determining whether or not it is a small win may be provided separately from the random number for judging whether or not it is a small win.

[Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
In the special pattern waiting process (FIG. 21), the special pattern 2 winning/losing determination process (S1202) is followed by the special pattern 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203). As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, in the special pattern 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether the game state is in the time-saving state (whether the time-saving flag is ON or not) (S1401). Then, if it is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non-time-saving state, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (S1402), and if it is ON (YES in S1402), it refers to the table for jackpots during non-time-saving state (the part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the non-time-saving state and jackpot), and selects a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403). In addition, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, in this embodiment 1, the table for jackpots during non-time-saving state is also divided according to whether the jackpot is a long jackpot (15R jackpot) or a short jackpot (2R jackpot). However, since this process is a variation pattern selection process for special chart 2, the only jackpot that can be won by the lottery for special chart 2 is the 15R fourth jackpot (long jackpot). Therefore, the location referenced in this process is always the long jackpot location, and variation pattern P1 or variation pattern P2 is selected. In addition, the table for jackpots during non-time-saving state does not have to be divided into long jackpots and short jackpots. This is also the same for the table for jackpots during time-saving state described later.

On the other hand, if the big win flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether the small win flag is ON or not (S1405). Then, if the small win flag is ON (YES in S1405), the table for non-time-saving state and small/medium wins (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the non-time-saving state and small win) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, in this embodiment 1, fluctuation pattern P4 is always selected.

Also, if the small win flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it is determined whether the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is a reach establishment random number value (S1406). As shown in FIG. 8 (C), the reach establishment random number value is "0" to "5" in the time-saving state, and "0" to "13" in the non-time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, a reach is less likely to occur when you miss than in the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the consumption of special reserved charts by selecting more misses without reach effects that have a short fluctuation time in the time-saving state.

If the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is a reach establishment random number value (YES in S1406), that is, if the reach is with or without a win, a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value by referring to the reach with or without a win table during non-time-saving state (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the non-time-saving state and the reach with or without a win) (S1407). In this embodiment 1, fluctuation pattern P5 or P6 is selected.

If the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is not a reach-established random number value (NO in S1406), that is, if there is no reach and no miss, a table for reach and no miss during non-time-saving state (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the non-time-saving state and no reach and no miss) is referenced and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S1408). When there is no reach and no miss, a function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls is activated. In other words, when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is "3" or "4", a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is "0" to "2". In this embodiment 1, fluctuation pattern P7 or P8 is selected.

In addition, in S1401, if it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving state (YES in S1401), as shown in FIG. 24, the processing (S1410 to S1416) is performed in the same manner as in steps S1402 to S1609 above, except that the fluctuation pattern table to be referenced is the table for the time-saving state (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state). In other words, if it is a big win, the portion in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state and the big win is referenced, if it is a small win, the portion in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state and the small win is referenced, if it is a reach with a miss, the portion in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state and the reach with a miss is referenced, and if it is a reach without a miss, the portion in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state and the reach without a miss is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table during the time-saving state (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state), the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls when there is no miss works when the number of reserved balls is "2" to "4". In other words, shortening fluctuation is more likely to be selected than in the non-time-saving state. Also, when a long jackpot is won, a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in the non-time-saving state. In other words, the fluctuation pattern table during the time-saving state is a table in which the average fluctuation time of special symbols is shorter than in the fluctuation pattern table during the non-time-saving state.

After the variation pattern is selected as described above, other processing (S1404) shown in FIG. 23 is performed, and then this processing ends. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in Fig. 25, in the special chart 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special chart reserved memory unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (for example, to the address "0000" side when the second special chart reserved memory unit 85b is composed of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the top address space of the second special chart reserved memory unit 85b, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth reserved second special chart (if the upper limit number has been stored) is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process is completed.

After executing the special symbol 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1205) in FIG. 21 is executed. In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1205), the special symbol operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the variation display of the second special symbol.

In the special pattern waiting process (S1102) of FIG. 21, if the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), the following processes are carried out in this order: special pattern 1 win/loss determination process (S1207), special pattern 1 change pattern selection process (S1208), special pattern 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special pattern 1 change start process (S1210).

[Special diagram 1 pass/fail judgment process]
As shown in Fig. 26, in the special drawing 1 winning/losing determination process (S1207), processing (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same manner as the special drawing 2 winning/losing determination process (S1202) shown in Fig. 22. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

However, since this process is related to special pattern 1, in S1601, the random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not a special pattern has been hit is read out from the lowest area of the first special pattern reserved memory unit 85a of the RAM (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first reserved first special pattern). In addition, in the type determination of the jackpot in S1608, it may be determined to be any of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, and the 2R third jackpot (Figure 8 (B)). As shown in the column for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) in Figure 8 (B), the distribution rate of each jackpot is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 50% for the 15R second jackpot, and 10% for the 2R third jackpot. If the type of jackpot is determined to be a 15R first jackpot or a 15R second jackpot, the long jackpot flag is turned ON in step S1609. On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is determined to be a 2R third jackpot, the short jackpot flag is turned ON in S1609.

[Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in Figures 27 and 28, in the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1720) is performed in the same manner as the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in Figures 23 and 24. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

However, since this process is related to special chart 1, if S1702 (Fig. 27) is YES (i.e., if the jackpot flag is ON), it is further determined whether the type of jackpot is a 15R jackpot (either a 15R first jackpot or a 15R second jackpot) (S1703). If it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S1703), the table for 15R jackpots in non-time-saving state (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in Fig. 9 that corresponds to the non-time-saving state and long jackpot) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, fluctuation pattern P1 or fluctuation pattern P2 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1703 that the jackpot is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1703), i.e., if the jackpot is a 2R third jackpot, the table for 2R jackpots in non-time-saving mode (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the non-time-saving mode and short jackpot) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S1706). Specifically, fluctuation pattern P3 is selected.

In addition, in this special chart 1 variation pattern selection process, even if S1712 (Fig. 28) is YES (i.e., the jackpot flag is ON), it is further determined whether the type of jackpot is a 15R jackpot (either a 15R first jackpot or a 15R second jackpot) (S1713). If it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S1713), the table for 15R jackpots in the time-saving state (the portion of the variation pattern table shown in Fig. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state and long jackpot) is referenced, and a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1714). Specifically, one of the variation patterns P9 to P11 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1713 that the 15R jackpot is not a jackpot (NO in S1713), i.e., if the 2R third jackpot is a jackpot, the table for 2R jackpots during time-saving state (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state and short jackpot) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S1715). Specifically, fluctuation pattern P12 is selected.

In this special chart 1 variation pattern selection process, after the variation pattern is selected (S1704, S1706, S1709, S1710, S1711, S1714, S1715, S1718, S1719, S1720), other processes (S1705, Figure 27) are performed and this process ends. In other processes (S1705), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1: Random number shift processing]
As shown in Fig. 29, in the special chart 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special chart reserved memory unit 85a is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the top address space of the first special chart reserved memory unit 85a, that is, (if the upper limit number has been stored) the RAM area corresponding to the fourth reserved first special chart is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process is completed.

After executing the special symbol 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1210) in FIG. 21 is executed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1210), the special symbol operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the variation display of the first special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
As shown in Fig. 30, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, it is determined whether the variation time of the special symbol (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 in Fig. 21, see Fig. 9) has elapsed (S1901). If it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. This allows the variation display of the special symbol to continue.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the high probability flag is ON or not (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the high probability counter is decremented by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether the value of the high probability counter is "0" or not (S1905). If it is determined in S1905 that the high probability counter is "0", the high probability flag is turned OFF and the process moves to S1907. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and if it is determined that the high probability counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process moves to S1907.

Then, in S1907, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON or not (S1907), and if it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the value of the time-saving counter that counts the number of times the special pattern has been displayed during the time-saving state is decremented by 1 (S1908), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" or not (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES in S1909), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911. Also, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special symbol operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing is performed, such as stopping the display of the special symbol changes based on the results of the special symbol hit/miss determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number (S1912), and this processing ends.

[Special design confirmation process]
As shown in Fig. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), it is then determined whether the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (15R 1st jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot, or 15R 4th jackpot) (S2002).

If it is a 15R jackpot (i.e. if the long jackpot flag is ON), the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game (in the case of one opening per round, one round is from the opening to the closing of the large prize opening) is set to "15", and the opening pattern of the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is set to the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot (see Figure 6) if it is a 15R first jackpot, or set to the opening pattern for the 15R second jackpot (see Figure 6) if it is a 15R second jackpot (S2003).

If in S2002 it is not a 15R jackpot (i.e. if the short jackpot flag is ON), the jackpot type is a 2R second jackpot, so the round counter value is set to "2" and the opening pattern for the 2R second jackpot (see Figure 6) is set as the opening pattern for the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) (S2004).

After completing the processing of S2003 or S2004, the jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2005), the opening performance of the jackpot game is started (S2006), and the special chart operation status is set to "4" (S2007).

In addition, if it is determined in S2001 that the big win flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether the small win flag is ON or not (S2008). If the small win flag is ON (YES in S2008), the value of the small win opening counter, which counts the number of times the big win port (second big win port 35) is opened during small win play, is set to "2", and the opening pattern for the big win devices (first big win device 31 and second big win device 36) is set to the opening pattern for small wins (see FIG. 6) (S2009).

After completing the processing of S2009, in order to start the small win game, the small win opening command is set (S2010), the opening performance of the small win game is started (S2011), and the special chart operation status is set to "5" (S2012). Note that if the small win flag is not ON in S2008 (NO in S2008), neither the big win game nor the small win game will start, so the special chart operation status is set to "1" and processing ends.

[Special Electric Device Processing 1 (Big Hit Game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric device processing 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (S2101), and if it is determined to be ON (YES in S2101), the probability variable flag is turned OFF (S2102). Also, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON or not (S2103), and if it is determined to be ON (YES in S2103), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S2104). In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time-saving state. In this embodiment 1, since the non-time-saving state is always a low base state, it is also controlled to a low base state during the execution of a jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of all the big prize devices (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) in the jackpot game has ended (the jackpot game has ended).

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is determined whether the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) is currently open (S2106). If it is not currently open (NO in S2106), it is determined whether the time has come to open the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35), i.e., whether the time for the jackpot opening has elapsed and it is time to start the first round, or whether the time for the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2107).

If the result of the judgment in S2107 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S2107 is YES, it is judged whether the round to be executed corresponds to either the first round or the second round (S2108). This may be judged using the value of a round counter for each type of jackpot, or a round counter that counts the round to be executed may be provided separately to judge. If it is neither the first nor the second round (i.e., any of the 3rd to 15th rounds) (NO in S2108), the process proceeds to S2110, where the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, if it is judged to be the first or second round (YES in S2108), the process proceeds to S2110 after performing a V validity period setting process (S2109), where the second large prize winning hole 35 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of jackpot.

In the V valid period setting process (S2109), the period during which the second large winning opening 35 is open and the period for several seconds after the second large winning opening 35 is closed in the first or second round is set as the period (corresponding to the first period) during which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is judged to be valid. In this embodiment 1, the other periods (including during a small win or when a special game is not being played) are set as the period (corresponding to the second period) during which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Here, judging the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a to be valid means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a (see steps S2401 to S2403 of the specific area sensor detection process (Figure 35) described later), and judging the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a to be invalid means not turning on the V flag even if the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a.

Here, when the specific area sensor 39a detects a game ball and the V flag is turned ON, the game status indicator 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game status indicator 46 is notified that the game status after the jackpot game ends will be a high probability state. Specifically, the game status indicator 46 is composed of three LEDs, "a1a2a3". In this embodiment 1, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is "a1□a2□a3□" (for example, □: off, ■: on). Also, when the specific area sensor 39a detects a game ball during the jackpot game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode is "a1■a2■a3■". When the jackpot game ends and the game status is set to a high probability state, the display mode is "a1□a2□a3□". Furthermore, the timing of the lighting control of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during a jackpot game, the display mode may remain "a1□a2□a3□" even if the game ball passes through a specific area, and when the game transitions to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, the display mode may change to "a1■a2■a3■", and when the game transitions from the high probability state to a low probability state, the display mode may change to "a1□a2□a3□".

In other words, in the specific area sensor detection process (Figure 35) described below, the V flag is turned ON only when a V passage (passage of the game ball into the specific area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is not turned ON when a V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the high probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (game state setting process (Figure 33) described below). In this way, the V flag is prevented from being turned ON based on a V passage caused by fraudulent conduct, that is, from being fraudulently set to a high probability state.

In addition, in the case of a 15R first jackpot or a 2R third jackpot, if there is a V pass in the first or second round, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a high probability state, while even if there is a V pass during a small jackpot, if the game state before the small jackpot game is normal, the game state after the small jackpot game is also normal, so that the probability of winning or losing is not changed before or after the jackpot game.

In this embodiment 1, in the V valid period setting process (S2109), the period in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is judged to be valid is set to the period (first period) even in the case of the 15R second jackpot, but as another embodiment, the first period may not be set in the 1R and 2R in the case of the 15R second jackpot. That is, the 1R and 2R may be set to the second period in the case of the 15R second jackpot. In the jackpot game related to the 15R second jackpot, the opening time of the second large winning hole 35 is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds, so that the possibility of the game ball entering the second large winning hole 35 is extremely low, but if the second period is set, the V flag will not be turned ON even if the ball enters. This makes it possible to prevent the V flag from being turned ON illegally or the V flag from being turned ON by a rare ball entering. In this embodiment, the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is enabled in the first or second round, but the location of the round does not have to be limited to this.

If the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) is open in S2106 (YES in S2106), it is determined whether the number of balls entering the large prize opening in that round has reached the specified maximum number of balls (10 per round in this embodiment 1) (S2111). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2111), it is determined whether the time has come to close the large prize opening (i.e., whether a specified opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened) (S2112). Then, if the opening time for the large prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the prescribed number of winning balls has been reached (YES in S2111), or if the opening time for the large prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), i.e., if one of the two round ending conditions has been met, the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) is closed (S2113). Then, the round counter value is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether the round counter value is "0" (S2115). If it is determined that the round counter value is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, if it is judged to be "0" (YES in S2115), as a jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2116) and the jackpot ending performance is started (S2117). Then, a jackpot end flag is set (S2118) and the process ends. Note that the round counter becomes "0" when the jackpot opening is executed 15 times in the case of a long jackpot (15R jackpot), and becomes "0" when the jackpot opening is executed twice in the case of a short jackpot (2R jackpot).

If the jackpot end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether the time to execute the jackpot ending performance has elapsed (S2119), and if the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), and the game status setting process (S2121) described below is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122), the special symbol operation status is set to "1" (S2123), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

[Game Status Setting Process]
As shown in Fig. 33, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned ON in the specific area sensor detection process (Fig. 35) described later. If the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability variable flag is turned ON (S2202), the probability variable counter is set to "140" (S2203), the V flag is turned OFF (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. That is, in this pachinko game machine 1, whether or not the game state after the big win game is set to the high probability state is determined based on whether or not the V flag is ON in this game state setting process.

On the other hand, if the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), the time-saving flag is turned ON without turning the probability variable flag ON (S2209), the time-saving counter is set to "100" (S2210), and processing ends. As a result, the game state after this jackpot game becomes a low probability state, a time-saving state, and a high base state (i.e., a low probability high base state). This low probability high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the special pattern variable display is performed 100 times (the total number of times the first special pattern variable display and the second special pattern variable display reach 100), or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, the time-saving counter and the probability variable counter count the total number of times the first special pattern variable display and the second special pattern variable display.

In S2205, it is determined whether the jackpot game that has just finished (the jackpot game that has just been played) is a 15R jackpot or not. If it is determined that it is not a 15R jackpot, i.e., that it is a 2R third jackpot (NO in S2205), it is then determined whether the game state before the jackpot game, i.e., the game state at the time of the 2R third jackpot, is in a time-saving state (S2208). If it is determined that it is not in a time-saving state (NO in S2208), the processing ends without turning on the time-saving flag. As a result, the game state after this jackpot game becomes a high probability state, a non-time-saving state for the special pattern, and a low base state (i.e. a high probability low base state). This high probability low base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner 140 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

On the other hand, if S2205 determines that the finished jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) was a 15R jackpot (YES in S2205), and if S2208 determines that the game state at the time of the 2R third jackpot was in the time-saving state (YES in S2208), the time-saving flag is turned ON (S2206), the time-saving counter is set to "140" (S2207), and processing ends. As a result, the game state after this jackpot game becomes a high probability state, a time-saving state for the special pattern, and a high base state (i.e., a high probability high base state). This high probability high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the special pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner 140 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, when a 2R third jackpot occurs and the V flag is turned ON during the jackpot play, the process (S2208) of determining whether the game state before the jackpot play is in the time-saving state is performed in order to make the operating state of the time-saving function before and after the jackpot play and the operating state of the high base function the same as for a small jackpot. If these operating states are different between a small jackpot and a 2R third jackpot, even if it is difficult to recognize which hit is which based on the opening pattern of the large prize opening, the subsequent operating state will determine which hit is which. This makes it difficult to distinguish between a small jackpot and a 2R third jackpot based on the opening pattern of the large prize opening, and also makes it difficult to distinguish based on the operating state of the time-saving function and high base generation function that occur afterwards. Note that it is also possible to simply turn on the time-saving flag if the V flag is ON without checking whether the time-saving state is in effect.

[Special Electric Device Processing 2 (Small Win Game)]
As shown in Fig. 34, in the special electric device process 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small win end flag is ON (S2301). The small win end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of all the big win devices (the first big win device 31 and the second big win device 36) in the small win game has been completed.

If the small win end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) is currently open (i.e., whether the large prize device is currently open) (S2302). If it is not currently open (NO in S2302), it is determined whether the time has come to open the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35), i.e., whether the time for the small prize opening has elapsed and it is time to start the first opening, or whether the interval time between multiple openings has elapsed and it is time to start the next opening (S2303).

If the result of the determination in S2303 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S2303 is YES, the V invalid period setting process (S2304) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2305, where the second large prize opening 35 is opened according to the opening pattern of the small prize (see FIG. 6).

In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the period during which the second large winning opening 35 is open and the period after the second large winning opening 35 is closed during a small winning game is set as a period (second period) during which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. In addition, in this embodiment 1, the period other than the period determined as the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2109) is set as the invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether it is not a valid period, that is, whether it is set to an invalid period. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80), which measures the elapse of the V valid period by counting down, is set to "0" (i.e., a state without a valid period). If the V timer is not "0", the V timer is set to "0". It is also possible to set the V timer to "0" without checking whether the V timer is "0" or not, that is, to a state without a valid period. As a result, even if a V passes during a small win, if the game state before the small win is normal, the game state after the small win is not transitioned to a high probability state. Note that in this embodiment 1, the period other than the period set as the valid period in the V valid period setting process (S2109) described above is an invalid period, so the process of S2304 may be omitted.

If the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) is open in S2302 (YES in S2302), it is determined whether the number of balls that entered the large prize opening during the two openings, i.e., the total number of game balls that entered during the two openings, has reached the specified maximum number of balls (10 in this embodiment 1) (S2306). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether it is time to close the large prize opening (i.e., whether a specified opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened) (S2307). Then, if the opening time of the large prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the number of balls entering the large prize opening during the two openings reaches the specified number (YES in S2506), the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to the small prize end process of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the large prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2307), the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) is closed (S2308). Then, the value of the small prize opening counter is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the small prize opening counter is "0" or not (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process ends as it is in order to start the next opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the count is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small win end process in S2311. In S2311, as the small win end process that ends the small win game, a small win ending command is set (S2311) and the small win ending presentation is started (S2312). Then, the small win end flag is set (S2313) and the process ends. The small win opening counter becomes "0" when the large prize opening has been opened twice.

In S2301, if the small win end flag is ON (YES in S2301), two releases have been completed, so it is determined whether the small win ending time has elapsed (S2315), and if the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), processing ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small win end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the small win flag is turned OFF (S2317), and the special symbol operation status is set to "1" (S2318), and processing ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) will be executed again as the special symbol operation processing (Figure 20).

The probability of winning or time-saving flag is not switched from ON to OFF when the small win game starts. Furthermore, the game state setting process (S2121, FIG. 34) is not performed when the small win game ends. In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, the game state is not changed before and after the small win game is executed.

[Specific area sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special chart operation process (S206) followed by the specific area sensor detection process (S207). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 35, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401), the process is terminated. If it is determined that there is detection in S2401 (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is in the V valid period (S2402). The V valid period is the period set in the V valid period setting process (S2109) in the special electric role process 1 (FIG. 32) described above. The V valid period is set in the first and second rounds of the big win game.

Also, if it is determined in S2402 that the V is in the valid period (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and it is determined whether the currently active jackpot game is a 2R jackpot (2R third jackpot) or not (S2404). If it is determined that it is not a 2R jackpot (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R jackpot, the first V pass command is set (S2405) and processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a 2R jackpot (YES in S2404), the second V pass command is set (S2406) and processing ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V pass command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub-control board 90 executes a game presentation in the presentation pattern display area or the like depending on the type of V pass command received.

Also, if it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in progress (NO in S2402), the third V passing command is set (S2407) without turning the V flag ON, and processing ends. The first V passing command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to control the notification of V passing. In contrast, the second V passing command and the third V passing command are commands for not causing the sub-control board 90 to control the notification of V passing as a general rule. The game control microcomputer 81 also functions as a means for switching between valid and invalid passing of the game ball into the specific area 39 (specific area state switching means) by executing such specific area sensor detection processing (S207) and V valid period setting processing (S2109).

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in Fig. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S208) following the specific area sensor detection process (S207). In the reserved ball number process (S208), as shown in Fig. 36, first, the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read (S2501). Next, the reserved ball number data (reserved ball number command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502).

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in Fig. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball count process (S208) followed by the power off monitoring process (S209). In the power off monitoring process (S209), as shown in Fig. 37, first, it is determined whether or not a power off signal has been input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is a power off signal input (YES in S2601), data regarding the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in a special mode, whether or not it is a winning game, how many reserved balls there are, how many times the special mode/time reduction mode is remaining, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then the loop process is performed without returning to the interrupt process (Fig. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to Figures 38 to 47. The counters, flags, status, buffers, etc., which appear in the operation description of the performance control microcomputer 91, are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-controller). When the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 reads out the program of the sub-control main process shown in Figure 38 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), etc. are set, and various flags, statuses, and counters are reset.

Next, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the result of this determination is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is YES (YES in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is not initialized and the process proceeds to S4004. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the power-off signal is ON but the contents of the RAM are not normal (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but if the power-off signal is ON due to a power outage or the like but the contents of the RAM are maintained normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on) and are not executed thereafter.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, a random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining effects are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining effects include a random number for determining a preview effect that determines a preview effect, and a random number for determining a performance pattern that determines a performance pattern. The method of updating the random numbers can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating, the random number value may be added by 2 instead of by 1. The random number for determining effects is acquired at a predetermined timing. This timing can be, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that a starting ball has been entered is transmitted from the main control board 80, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying the start of a change is transmitted from the main control board 80, or when a change performance pattern described later is determined. The acquired random numbers for determining effects are stored in a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In this embodiment 1, the random numbers for determining advance notice effects include random numbers for determining conversation advance notice, random numbers for determining step-up advance notice, random numbers for determining pseudo-variable advance notice, random numbers for determining movable part advance notice, and random numbers for determining advance notification effects, and the advance notice effects to be executed are determined using the acquired values of these random numbers for determining advance notice effects and the advance notice determination tables in Figures 49 and 50.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command executes various effects (such as effect pattern game effects and special game effects associated with big win games and small win games) using various effect devices (such as the image display device 7, the speaker 67, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the movable decorative member 14) according to the received command. The effect control microcomputer 91 then permits interrupts (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupts are permitted, the reception interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt process (S4008), as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 has been input to the external INT input section of the performance control microcomputer 91 (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), the various commands sent from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and the process is terminated. This reception interrupt process (S4008) is executed in priority to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 40, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) first performs an input process to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) is performed to output the lamp data created in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (described later). Next, a drive data output process (S4203) is performed to create and output drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14. Then, a watchdog timer process (S4204) is performed to reset the watchdog timer.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec period is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) first performs a received command analysis process (S4301), which will be described later. Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed to store the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4302). Next, a switch process is performed to set the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S4303). After that, other processes are performed, such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the performance (S4304).

[Received command analysis process]
As shown in Figures 42 and 43, in the received command analysis process (S4301), first, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not it has received a start ball entry command from the main control board 80 (main control unit) (S4401), and if it judges that it has received the start ball entry command (YES in S4401), it then performs the ball entry performance start process described below (S4402) and moves on to the process of S4403. If it judges that it has not received the start ball entry command in S4401 (NO in S4401), it moves on to the process of S4403 without performing the ball entry performance start process.

In S4403, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit (S4403), and if it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the fluctuation performance start process described below is performed (S4404) and processing transitions to S4405. If it is determined that a fluctuation start command has not been received in S4403 (NO in S4403), the fluctuation performance start process is not performed and processing transitions to S4405. In S4405, it is determined whether or not there is an unexecuted preview performance, etc. (game performance) (S4405), and if it is determined that there is an unexecuted preview performance, etc. (YES in S4405), the preview performance, etc. execution process described below is performed (S4406) and processing transitions to S4407. If it is determined that there is no unexecuted preview performance, etc. (NO in S4405), processing transitions to S4407 without executing the preview performance, etc. Here, "unexecuted preview effects, etc." refers to game effects that have been set and decided to be executed in the preview effect setting process (S4506) and have not yet been executed, but have been set and have not yet been executed. These set game effects that have not yet been executed will be executed in order when the execution timing set for each game effect arrives.

In S4407, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control unit (S4407), and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4407), the fluctuation performance end process described below is performed (S4408) and processing transitions to S4409. If it is determined in S4407 that a fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4407), processing transitions to S4409 without performing the fluctuation performance end process.

Next, in S4409, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main control unit (S4409), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (YES in S4409), a special game effect selection process (described later) is performed (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411. If it is determined that an opening command has not been received in S4409 (NO in S4409), the process proceeds to S4411 without performing the special game effect selection process. In S4411, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control unit (S4411), and if it is determined that an ending command has been received (YES in S4411), an ending effect selection process is performed (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4413. On the other hand, if it is determined that an ending command has not been received in S4411 (NO in S4411), the process proceeds to S4413 without performing the ending effect selection process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the first V passing command has been received from the main control unit (S4413), and if it is determined that the first V passing command has been received (YES in S4413), the V passing notification command is set (S4414) and the process proceeds to S4415. The first V passing command is a command that notifies the sub-control board 90 from the main control board 80 that a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V effective period in the 15R first jackpot. When the V passing notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) or the like in the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads out predetermined image information from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays characters such as "V passing!" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This notifies the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 and that the game state after the jackpot game ends will be a high probability state. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4413 that the first V passing command has not been received (NO in S4413), the process proceeds to S4415 without setting the V passing notification command.

Displaying the words "V Pass!" is one way of notifying the player that a V has passed, and other display content (for example, displaying an object image that resembles the letter "V" or displaying the words "Get Special Chance") may be used to notify the player that a V has passed. This makes it possible to notify the player that the game state after the ongoing jackpot game (special game) will be a high probability state.

Next, in S4415, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the second V pass command has been received from the main control unit (S4415), and if it determines that the second V pass command has not been received (NO in S4415), it determines whether or not the third V pass command has been received (S4417). Then, in either case where it is determined in S4415 that the second V pass command has been received (YES in S4415) or where it is determined in S4417 that the third V pass command has been received (YES in S4417), it sets the V pass non-notification command (S4416) and proceeds to processing of S4418. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4417 that the third V pass command has not been received (NO in S4417), it proceeds to processing of S4418 without setting the V pass non-notification command. In S4418, other processing is performed based on received commands other than the above-mentioned commands (for example, a normal pattern change start command or a normal pattern change stop command), and the processing ends. Here, the second V pass command is a command from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90 that a game ball was detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 2R third big win. Also, the third V pass command is a command from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90 that a game ball was detected by the specific area sensor 39a during a V invalid period such as during a small win.

When the V-passing non-notification command is sent to the image control board 100 etc. in the command sending process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 controls the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to display a screen that does not display any text indicating that a V has been passed, such as "V Passed!" (i.e., a screen that does not display any notification of V passing). In other words, this is a V-passing non-notification mode. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 2R third big hit or small hit, this fact is not notified to the player.

The command set in the specific area sensor detection process (Fig. 35) may be only the first V pass command, and the second V pass command and the third V pass command may not be set. In this case, the received command analysis process (S4301) does not execute S4415 to S4417. Even with this configuration, a pachinko game machine can be created in which the player is notified of a V pass only when it occurs during the V valid period in the 15R first jackpot. In other words, if no performance is performed to notify of a V pass, there is no need to set a command (V pass non-notification command). However, it is possible to increase the stability of image control by setting a command as in this embodiment and controlling the image control board 100 based on it.

[Start of performance process when the ball enters the goal]
The ball entry performance start process (S4402) is a process executed when a start ball entry command indicating that a ball has entered the starting hole is received from the main control unit. This process controls the display (control of the number of display items and the display mode of the performance hold) of the performance hold (first performance hold 9a and second performance hold 9b) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and performs a so-called pre-reading performance (also called "pre-performance" or "pre-notice") based on the acquired information acquired by the main control unit when the ball enters the starting hole. Note that the pre-reading performance is a notice performance that starts a performance (game performance) before the start of the variable display of the performance pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of a predetermined special pattern hit/miss judgment. In other words, the pre-reading performance is executed in conjunction with the variable display (also called "pre-variation") of the performance pattern (special pattern) that is executed before the start of the variable display (also called "the change") of the performance pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of a predetermined special pattern hit/miss judgment. In addition, a preview effect (including a pre-reading effect) is an effect that shows (suggests) the possibility that the result of the changing display of the effect pattern (special pattern), which shows the result of a judgment on whether a specified special pattern is a hit or not, will be a jackpot (the display will stop in a jackpot mode/jackpot pattern) before the changing display of the effect pattern (special pattern) ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, in the ball entry performance start process (S4402), first, in S5001, a process of turning on a specific flag is performed, and then the process proceeds to S5002. Here, the "specific flag" in this embodiment 1 is a flag that indicates a state (high load state) in which the load of the control process performed by the sub-control unit 90 (also called the "game performance control unit") is relatively high (the amount of control processing is large). Then, this "specific flag" is turned ON when the ball entry performance start process is executed, and turned OFF when the ball entry performance start process is completed. In other words, in this embodiment 1, the period during which the ball entry performance start process is being executed is a period in which the amount of processing of control (performance control process, advance notice performance control process) related to the game performance of the sub-control unit (game performance control unit) is greater than a predetermined amount. In this embodiment 1, the advance notice determination table used in the advance notice performance setting process described later is different depending on the state (ON or OFF) of this "specific flag". In addition, the ON state of this specific flag is also called the "high load state" or "second control state," and the OFF state of the specific flag is also called the "low load state" or "first control state."

Next, in S5002, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance performs a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number for determining the pre-performance for pre-performance (S5002), and proceeds to the process of S5003. When the start-entry command is received from the main control unit 80, the process of S5002 is performed to acquire a predetermined value (acquired information) from the random number for determining the pre-performance (not shown). In addition, in the pre-performance decision process (S5005) described later, based on this acquired value, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-performance, and if so, the execution mode, etc. In S5003, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance analyzes the start-entry command received from the main control unit, and proceeds to the process of S5004. The start-entry command includes a variation pattern specification command (information specifying the variation pattern to be executed) that can specify the variation pattern to be selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special pattern or the second special pattern. It also includes reserved information that specifies the number of acquired information (memory number, reserved number) currently stored in the first special pattern reserved memory unit 85a and the second special pattern reserved memory unit 85b, game status information that specifies the current game status, the judgment result (preliminary judgment result) of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment or the second special pattern hit/miss judgment, and pattern information that specifies the hit type, etc.

In S5004, a table for determining the pre-performance is set (S5004), and based on the set pre-performance determination table, the information contained in the start ball entry command, and the pre-performance determination random number obtained in S5002, it is determined whether or not to execute a pre-performance, and if so, what type of pre-performance to execute (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5006.

In S5006, display control of the effect holds (first effect hold and second effect hold) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is performed, and the process proceeds to S5007. Specifically, based on the hold information analyzed in the start ball entry command analysis process (S5003), in order to show the player the number of acquired information stored in the first special chart hold memory unit 85a and the second special chart hold memory unit 85b, control is performed to display the first effect hold and the second effect hold that show the same number as the number of acquired information stored. This allows the player to easily grasp the current number of holds.

In addition, by changing the display mode of the first and second performance holds, or by making the display mode of the first and second performance holds a special display mode different from the normal display mode, if it is indicated before the start of the display of the changing performance pattern related to the performance hold that the result may be a specific result (jackpot), (if a pre-performance is executed), the corresponding display control processing is performed in the performance hold display processing of S5006.

In S5007, the specific flag is turned OFF and the ball-entering performance start process is terminated. By determining that this specific flag is OFF, it is possible to determine that the ball-entering performance start process is not being executed, that is, that the control processing amount for the game performance performed by the sub-control unit is a predetermined amount. Here, whether or not the "control processing amount for the game performance is a predetermined amount" means whether or not the control processing amount is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold (the control processing amount is within a predetermined range), and in this embodiment, rather than actually measuring the control processing amount, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a specific control process (in the first embodiment, the "ball-entering performance start process") that generally results in a large control processing amount (also simply called "processing amount") is being executed. Therefore, when a predetermined specific control process is being executed, it is assumed that the "control processing amount for the game performance is greater than a predetermined amount," and the corresponding control process for a high load state is executed. Note that, as another embodiment, a measuring means for actually measuring the load on the CPU of the sub-control unit may be provided, and when the value (load) measured by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined threshold, the corresponding control process for a high load state may be executed.

[Variable performance start processing]
As shown in FIG. 45, in the variable performance start process (S4404), first, in S4501, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a performance determination random number acquisition process (S4501) to acquire performance determination random numbers such as a preview performance determination random number and a performance pattern determination random number. Specifically, in this embodiment, the preview performance determination random numbers include a conversation preview determination random number (also called a "first preview performance determination random number"), a step-up preview determination random number (also called a "second preview performance determination random number"), a pseudo-variable preview determination random number (also called a "third preview performance determination random number"), a moving part preview determination random number (also called a "fourth preview performance determination random number"), and a pre-notification performance determination random number ("fifth preview performance determination random number"), and at the timing of receiving a variable start command from the main control unit 80, the process of S4501 is performed to acquire a predetermined value (acquired information) from each random number. In addition, in the preview performance setting process (S4506) described below, the preview performance etc. to be executed in conjunction with the changing display of the performance pattern (special pattern) is determined based on this acquired value.

Next, in S4502, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the fluctuation start command (S4502). The fluctuation start command includes a fluctuation pattern designation command (information designating a fluctuation pattern) that designates the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The information designating the fluctuation pattern includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P17) shown in FIG. 9, game state information designating the current game state, the judgment result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment or the second special symbol hit/miss judgment, and pattern information designating the hit type (see FIG. 8). The fluctuation pattern information, game state information, pattern information, and the like can also be used in other processes other than the fluctuation effect start process executed thereafter.

Next, at S4503, the performance control microcomputer 91 references the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is used to determine the performance mode to be executed. The mode status is a value between "1" and "5," and each value is assigned to a performance mode A through E.

The presentation mode here refers to the manner of presentation on the image display device 7, and when the presentation mode is different, some or all of the presentation modes of the game presentations, such as the preview presentation and reach presentation, are different. Specifically, the images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as different characters, items, and background images that appear, and the presentation pattern game presentation can also be executed in a manner corresponding to the presentation mode. In addition, when multiple game presentations (preview presentations, reach presentations, etc.) are provided, different game presentations may be executed depending on the presentation mode. In this embodiment, presentation mode A is executed when the game is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state, presentation mode B is executed when the game is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and presentation mode C is executed when the game is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state. Therefore, by checking which of the presentation modes A to C the game is in, the player can understand the current game state.

In addition, presentation mode D or presentation mode E is executed when the game is controlled to a high probability low base state or a low probability low base state. Therefore, when presentation mode is D or E, even if the player checks the presentation mode, it is difficult for him or her to understand whether the probability state of the special pattern hit determination is in a high probability state or a low probability state (normal state). In that sense, presentation modes D and E can be said to be probability non-notification modes.

Next, in S4504, a variable presentation pattern determination table is set to determine the variable presentation pattern (also called the "presentation pattern") of the image display device 7, the panel lamps 5, the movable decorative members 14, etc., controlled by the presentation control microcomputer 91 (S4504). Specifically, a presentation pattern variable mode determination table (not shown) for determining the variable mode of the presentation pattern is set as the variable presentation pattern determination table based on the variable pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. In this embodiment, a different presentation pattern variable mode determination table is set depending on the game state and presentation mode.

Next, in S4505, a variable presentation pattern that matches the specified variable pattern and corresponds to the presentation mode indicated by the referenced mode status is selected based on the variable presentation pattern table set in S4504 (S4505). Also, in S4505, among the variable presentation patterns, the variation mode of the presentation pattern displayed in the presentation pattern display area 7b (mode of presentation pattern game presentation) is mainly determined. As a result, in the presentation pattern game presentation, a case where a reach presentation is executed (reach presentation pattern game presentation), a case where a character presentation using a specific character is executed (character presentation pattern game presentation), and a case where a reach presentation or character presentation is not executed (no reach presentation pattern game presentation) are set.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment has the following settings for the change modes of the performance symbols: Reach A, Reach B, Reach C, Super Reach (also called "SP Reach") A, Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and character performance, and in S4505, it is determined which of these performances will be performed, or whether none of these performances will be performed (this is also called "normal change"), based on the performance symbol change mode determination table.

When a reach-with-effect pattern game presentation is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the effect pattern variation mode determination table. When a reach-with-effect pattern game presentation is executed, if reach A, reach B, or reach C (also called "normal reach") is executed, the "reach flag" is turned ON and the "super reach flag" is turned OFF, and when super reach A, super reach B, or super reach C is executed, the "super reach flag (also called "SP reach flag")" is turned ON and the "reach flag" is turned OFF. When a reach-with-effect pattern game presentation is not executed, the "reach flag" and "super reach flag" are turned OFF. The state of these flags is determined and a pre-notification presentation, which will be described later, is performed.

When the Super Reach effect is executed as the game effect, it is set so that the possibility of a jackpot is higher than when the Normal Reach effect is executed. In other words, the Super Reach effect is a game effect with a higher jackpot reliability (possibility of a jackpot, possibility of executing a jackpot game) than the Reach (Normal Reach) effect. Next, in S4506, a process for setting the advance notice effect, etc., which will be described later, is performed. In the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), based on the effect determination random number obtained in S4501, it is determined which of the advance notice effect types, which will be described later, will be executed among the variable effect patterns. In addition, the effect pattern to be displayed as a stop (also called the "stop effect pattern") is determined. The variable effect pattern is determined by these processes (S4505 and S4506).

Next, in S4507, a variable presentation start command is set (S4507) to start a presentation pattern game presentation, etc. based on the variable presentation pattern selected in S4505 and S4506, and the variable presentation start process is terminated. In addition, when the variable presentation start command set in S4505 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads out a specified presentation image from the ROM of the image control board 100, and performs a presentation pattern game presentation on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The effect pattern displayed as a result of the effect pattern game effect is a repeating odd number such as "777" when the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a 15R first big hit, and an even number such as "666" when the result is a 15R second big hit. In addition, when there is a reach and a miss, one of the three effect patterns such as "787" is a different effect pattern from the other effect patterns, and when there is a reach and a miss, at least one of the three effect patterns such as "635" is a different effect pattern from the other effect patterns. In addition, when there is a 2R third big hit and a small hit, a predetermined chance pattern such as "135" or a special pattern for the 2R third big hit and small hit such as "3☆3" may be stopped and displayed. In other words, the same effect pattern is stopped and displayed for the 2R third big hit and the small hit. For this reason, a player cannot tell whether a 2R third specific big win or a small win has occurred just by checking the displayed effect pattern. Note that the above-mentioned display pattern stop mode is only an example, and the stop effect pattern that is displayed when a big win occurs can be changed as appropriate.

[Preview/Preview Settings Processing]
As shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, in the notice performance setting process (S4506), first, it is determined whether the above-mentioned "specific flag" is ON or not (S4922). Then, when it is determined that the specific flag is ON (YES in S4922), that is, when it is determined that the load of the sub-control unit is high (the amount of processing of the control related to the game performance performed by the sub-control unit is large), the notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 53 is set as the notice determination table for determining whether or not to perform the notice performance and, if so, which notice performance to perform, and the like (S4923), and the process proceeds to S4901. Note that, since multiple notice determination tables are set as the notice determination table for the high load state, they are also called "notice determination table group". On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific flag is OFF (NO in S4922), the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is set as the notice determination table (S4924), and the process proceeds to S4901. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1, under normal load conditions except when the load on the sub-control unit is particularly high, i.e., when a specific flag is ON, the preview performance is determined using the preview determination table for low load conditions shown in Figure 52.

More specifically, the notice determination table to be used is set from the notice determination tables shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 based on the state (ON or OFF) of the specific flag and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. For example, if the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is "P1 (variation pattern 1)" and the specific flag is OFF, the notice determination table is set to the conversation notice determination table for P1 and P9 for low load conditions, the step-up notice determination table for P1 and P9, the cut-in notice determination table for P1 and P9, and the moving part notice determination table for P1 and P9 shown in FIG. 52.

Next, the process from S4901 onwards determines the preview performance to be executed during the changing display of the special pattern (performance pattern) and the performance pattern (stop performance pattern) to be displayed after the changing display of the performance pattern, based on the random numbers for performance determination (random numbers for deciding preview performance, random numbers for deciding performance pattern) obtained in S4501 and the preview determination table set in S4504, etc.

In S4901, a decision is made as to which of the multiple conversation preview performances to execute, or whether or not to execute a conversation preview performance, based on the value of the random number for determining the conversation preview obtained in S4501 and the conversation preview determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this embodiment, there are four types of preview performances that constitute (belong to) the main preview performance type in a low load state, and one type of preview performance that constitutes (belongs to) the main preview performance type in a high load state. Here, the random number for determining the conversation preview has a random number range of 0 to 99, and the acquired value determines which of the four types of conversation preview performances to execute, or whether or not to execute a conversation preview performance.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is P2 (fluctuation pattern 2) and the specific flag is ON, the conversation preview decision table for P2, P10, and P11 for the high load state shown in FIG. 53 is set. If the acquired random number for conversation preview decision is any of "0 to 29, 60 to 99" (selection probability: 70%), the conversation preview performance is not executed. If the acquired value is any of "30 to 59" (30%), the conversation preview performance of "Chance" of rank K3 is displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b at a predetermined timing. In this way, when the specific flag is ON (high load state), the execution mode of the conversation preview performance is limited to only one mode of "Chance". In other words, if it is determined whether or not to execute the conversation preview performance, and it is determined to execute it, the conversation preview performance of "Chance" (specific preview performance) is always executed. Therefore, in this preview performance type (conversation preview performance), it can be said that the preview performance that can be executed is fixed.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is P2 (fluctuation pattern 2) and the specific flag is ON, the conversation notice determination table for P2, P10, and P11 for low load state (normal) shown in FIG. 52 is set. If the acquired conversation notice determination random number value is any of "0 to 19" (selection probability: 20%), the conversation notice performance is not executed. If the acquired value is any of "20 to 24" (5%), the conversation notice performance of "Hello" of rank K1 will be displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b at a predetermined timing. If the acquired value is any of "25 to 29" (5%), the conversation notice performance of "Reach!?" of rank K2 will be executed. This is a notice performance that notifies the player that there is a high possibility of a reach occurring (for example, a reliability of about 50%). If the acquired value is any of "30 to 59" (30%), the conversation notice performance of "Chance" of rank K3 will be executed. This is a preview effect that informs the player that there is a relatively high probability of hitting the jackpot (for example, a reliability of about 20%). Furthermore, if the acquired value is between "60 and 99" (40%), a "Super Hot" conversation preview effect of rank K4 will be executed. This is a preview effect that informs the player that there is a fairly high probability of hitting the jackpot (for example, a reliability of about 40%).

The ranks are set in order of the likelihood of a jackpot (jackpot reliability) when the preview performance is executed, as follows: K4>K3>K2>K1. Therefore, in this conversation preview performance, the "super hot" performance mode associated with rank K4 is the preview performance that indicates the highest jackpot probability (possibility of special game execution). In addition, since the variation pattern P2 is a variation pattern associated with a jackpot, the execution possibility of a conversation preview performance with a high jackpot reliability is set higher than the execution possibility of a conversation preview performance with a low jackpot reliability. In this way, when the specific flag is OFF (low load state), the execution mode of the conversation preview performance is set to the four modes shown in FIG. 52 (A). In other words, even if it is determined that a conversation preview performance is to be executed, a different type of preview performance will be executed depending on the acquired variation pattern information and the value of the random number for determining the conversation preview.

In S4902, if it is determined that a conversation preview will be executed (YES in S4902), a conversation preview flag (also called the "first preview flag" or "first preview information") indicating that a conversation preview will be executed is turned ON (S4903), the determined conversation preview performance is set (S4904), and processing transitions to S4906. On the other hand, if it is determined that a conversation preview will not be executed (NO in S4902), the conversation preview flag is turned OFF (or remains OFF if it is already OFF) (S4905), and processing transitions to S4906.

Next, in S4906, based on the value of the step-up notice determination random number obtained in S4501 and the step-up notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53), it is determined which of the multiple step-up notice performances will be performed or not performed (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. In addition, in this embodiment, there are five types of notice performances that constitute this notice performance type, regardless of whether the load is low or high. Here, the step-up notice determination random number has a random number range of 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the five types of step-up notice performances will be performed or not performed depending on the obtained value. Here, the "step-up notice performance" is a performance that changes in five stages from step 1 to step 5, and in this embodiment 1, five characters (five types) are displayed one by one from step 1 to step 5, and all five characters are displayed together in step 5. This is a chronological performance, so the more steps you progress the longer the execution time will be.

The specific method of determining the step-up notice performance is the same as the conversation notice performance described above, so the explanation will be omitted. The ranks are set in order of the probability of a jackpot (jackpot reliability) when the notice performance is executed, as follows: S5>S4>S3>S2>S1. Also, if it is determined in S4907 that the step-up notice performance will be executed (YES in S4907), the step-up notice flag (also called the "second notice flag" or "second notice information") indicating that the step-up notice performance will be executed is turned ON (S4908), the determined step-up notice performance is set (S4909), and the process proceeds to S4911. On the other hand, if it is determined that the step-up notice performance will not be executed (NO in S4907), the step-up notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it is left OFF) (S4910), and the process proceeds to S4911.

Next, in S4911, based on the value of the random number for determining the cut-in notice obtained in S4501 and the cut-in notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53), it is determined which of the multiple cut-in notice performances to execute or not execute (S4911), and the process proceeds to S4912. In this embodiment, there are three types of notice performances that constitute the main notice performance type in a low load state, and one type of notice performance that constitutes the main notice performance type in a high load state. Here, the random number for determining the cut-in notice has a random number range of 0 to 99, and the obtained value determines which of the three types of cut-in notice performances to execute or not execute. Here, the "cut-in preview effect" refers to a preview effect that indicates the possibility that the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment will be a jackpot, in which either character A, B, or C suddenly appears (cuts in) at a specified timing during the varying display of the performance symbol, and the type of character displayed and the timing of its display indicate the possibility of a jackpot. For example, the characters displayed can indicate a high possibility of a jackpot (possibility of executing a special game) in the order of characters C (high) > B (medium) > A (low), and the closer a character is displayed after the varying display (closer to the stop display), the higher the possibility of a jackpot.

The specific method of determining the cut-in notice performance is the same as the conversation notice performance described above, so the explanation will be omitted. The ranks are set in order of the probability of a jackpot (jackpot reliability) when the notice performance is executed, C3>C2>C1. Also, if it is determined in S4912 that a cut-in notice performance will be executed (YES in S4912), the cut-in notice flag (also called the "third notice flag" or "third notice information") indicating that a cut-in notice performance will be executed is turned ON (S4913), the determined cut-in notice performance is set (S4914), and the process proceeds to S4916. On the other hand, if it is determined that a cut-in notice performance will not be executed (NO in S4912), the cut-in notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it is left OFF) (S4915), and the process proceeds to S4916.

Next, in S4916, a determination is made as to which of the multiple moving part preview performances will be executed, or whether no moving part preview performance will be executed, based on the value of the moving part preview determination random number obtained in S4501 and the cut-in preview determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see Figure 52 or Figure 53), and processing proceeds to S4917. In this embodiment, there are three types of preview performances that make up the main preview performance type in a low load state, and two types of preview performances that make up the main preview performance type in a high load state. Here, the moving part preview determination random number has a random number range of 0 to 99, and the obtained value determines which of the three types of moving part preview performances will be executed, or whether no moving part preview performance will be executed. Here, the "moving part preview performance" refers to a performance that uses a movable decorative member 14 that performs a specified action, and includes a performance in which a light-emitting member provided on the movable decorative member 14 or visible through the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a specified manner, a performance in which the movable decorative member 14 operates in a specified operating manner, and a performance that combines illumination and operation.

The specific method for determining the moving part notice performance is the same as the conversation notice performance described above, so the explanation will be omitted. The ranks are set in order of the likelihood of a jackpot (jackpot reliability) when the notice performance is executed, as follows: M3>M2>M1. Also, if it is determined in S4917 that the moving part notice performance will be executed (YES in S4917), the moving part notice flag (also called the "fourth notice flag" or "fourth notice information") indicating that the moving part notice performance will be executed is turned ON (S4918), the determined moving part notice performance is set (S4919), and the process proceeds to S4921. On the other hand, if it is determined that the moving part notice performance will not be executed (NO in S4917), the moving part notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it is left OFF) (S4920), and the process proceeds to S4921.

In S4921, the effect pattern to be displayed in a stopped state is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the effect pattern obtained in S4501 and a effect pattern determination table (not shown), and the determined effect pattern (stop effect pattern) is set (S4926), and the processing ends.

As mentioned above, the notice determination table used in the low load state (specific flag OFF state) shown in FIG. 52 and the notice determination table used in the high load state (specific flag ON state) shown in FIG. 53 have the same number of notice performance types (four types: conversation notice performance, step-up notice performance, cut-in notice performance, and moving part notice performance) to be determined, but the number of notice performances to be determined is different. Specifically, in the notice determination table for the high load state, the notice performances belonging to the conversation notice performance type are reduced from four to one, the notice performances belonging to the step-up notice performance type remain unchanged at five, the notice performances belonging to the cut-in notice performance type are reduced from three to one, and the notice performances belonging to the moving part notice performance type are reduced from three to two. In other words, the number of notice performances to be determined is reduced from 15 to nine. As a result, in the high load state (specific flag ON state), the number of processes of the notice performance determination process (also called the "game performance determination process") that determines the notice performance is reduced compared to the low load state (specific flag OFF state). In other words, the control load imposed on the sub-controller by the control process for the preview performance decision process (preview performance decision unit) is higher when the preview performance is decided using the preview performance decision table for low load conditions shown in FIG. 52 than when the preview performance is decided using the preview performance decision table for high load conditions shown in FIG. 53.

Therefore, during the ball entry performance start process in which the specific flag is ON, the amount of processing for control of game performances other than the advance performance determination process by the sub-control unit increases (high load state), so the sub-control unit performs a low-load control process for the advance performance determination process. Also, when the amount of processing for control of game performances other than the advance performance determination process by the sub-control unit is not so high (low load state), the advance performance determination process is performed using a advance decision table that has a relatively high load but has a large number of game performances to be determined. This prevents the load on the sub-control unit (the CPU of the sub-control unit) from becoming excessive, and enables the execution of highly varied and interesting game performances (advance performances, etc.), making it possible to increase interest in the game. This also makes it possible to optimize the control of game performances executed by the sub-control unit.

In addition, in this embodiment 1, although the number of preview effects to be determined during a high load state is reduced, the number of preview determination tables, i.e., the number of executable preview effect types, is not reduced. As a result, during the variable display of one performance pattern, the number of game effects (number of preview effect types) that can be executed during the variable display is the same whether in a low load state or a high load state (in this embodiment 1, 0 to 4 preview effects (preview performance types) can be executed in either state). Also, during the variable display of one performance pattern, the maximum number of game effects (maximum number of preview effect types) that can be executed during the variable display is the same whether in a low load state or a high load state (in this embodiment 1, a maximum of 4 preview effects can be executed in either state). As a result, while the number of preview effects to be determined during a high load state (when a specific flag is ON) is reduced, the number of executable game effects is maintained, making it possible to prevent a decrease in game interest as much as possible.

However, as shown in Figures 52 and 53, for preview performance types (conversation preview performances, cut-in preview performances, moving part preview performances) in which the number of preview performances is reduced in the preview decision table for the high load state, the possibility of executing the preview performance of that preview performance type is low. For this reason, when deciding which preview performance to execute based on the preview decision table for the low load state, there is a higher possibility that a greater number of preview performances will be executed during one variable display than when deciding which preview performance to execute based on the preview decision table for the high load state. However, by not reducing the number that can be executed (maximum number), it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game as much as possible.

[Preview performance execution process]
Next, the notice performance execution process (S4406) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. This notice performance execution process (S4406) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a notice performance that has not been executed during execution of a variable performance (during the variable display of the performance pattern). First, in S5101, it is determined whether or not the start time of the notice performance has arrived (S5101). The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 has a conversation notice flag, a step-up notice flag, a cut-in notice flag, and a movable part notice flag as notice flags, and it is determined whether or not there is a notice performance that has not been executed (the execution time has not arrived) among the notice performances indicated by these flags and that has arrived at the execution time (start time). In addition, the execution timing of these notice performances to be executed is set in the notice performance setting process (S4506), and the execution time is controlled by a predetermined timer means of the sub-control unit. Then, when the count value of the timer means indicates the start time of a predetermined notice performance, it is determined that the start time of the notice performance has arrived. In addition to the preview effect, it may be possible to determine whether the time for the start of other game effects (lamp effects, background effects, game mode effects, etc.) has arrived and control the start and end of those game effects.

If it is determined in S5101 that there is a preview performance etc. whose start time has arrived (YES in S5101), a preview performance start command (conversation preview start command, step-up preview start command, cut-in preview start command, moving part preview start command, etc.) for executing the rehearsal performance whose start time has arrived is set (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5103. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that there is no preview performance etc. whose start time has arrived (NO in S5101), the process proceeds to S5103. The preview performance start command set in the process of S5102 is sent to the image control board 100 (image control unit) by command sending process (S4006). Then, the CPU of the image control board 100 that received the preview performance start command reads out the performance image corresponding to the preview performance related to the preview performance start command from the ROM of the image control board 100, displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and performs the performance pattern game performance.

In S5103, it is determined whether or not there is a preview performance, etc. currently being performed (S5103), and if it is determined that there is no preview performance, etc. currently being performed (NO in S5103), the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5103 that there is a preview performance, etc. currently being performed (YES in S5103), it is then determined whether or not the end of the execution period of the preview performance, etc. currently being performed has arrived (S5104). Since an execution period is set for each preview performance, and the execution period is controlled by a predetermined timer means possessed by the sub-control unit, when the count value of the timer means indicates the end of the predetermined preview performance currently being performed, it is determined that the end of that preview performance has arrived.

If it is determined in S5104 that the end time of the preview performance etc. being executed has arrived (YES in S5104), a preview performance end command (conversation preview end command, step-up preview end command, cut-in preview end command, moving part preview end command, etc.) is set to end the preview performance for which the end time has arrived (S5105), and the process ends. Also, if it is determined in S5104 that the end time has arrived for none of the preview performance etc. being executed (NO in S5104), the process ends. The preview performance end command set in the process of S5105 is sent to the image control board 100 (image control unit) by the command sending process (S4006). Then, the CPU of the image control board 100 that has received the preview performance end command ends the display of the preview performance related to the preview performance end command, and performs the performance pattern game performance. Here, in this embodiment 1, the preview performance etc. being executed is ended by the preview performance end command, but this is not limited to such a form. Regarding the end control of preview performances, etc., for some or all of these preview performances, etc., the preview performance may be started based on a preview performance start command, without relying on an end preview performance command (without providing an end preview performance command), and the preview performance may then end when a predetermined performance time has elapsed.

[Variable performance end processing]
As shown in FIG. 49, in the variable performance end process (S4408), first, in S4601, the performance control microcomputer 91 analyzes the variable stop command (S4601) and refers to the mode status (S4602). Next, in S4603, it is determined whether the mode status is "1" or not, that is, whether the performance mode is the performance mode A or not (S4603). If the mode status is "1", the process proceeds to S4607. On the other hand, if the mode status is not "1", the value "M" of the performance mode counter corresponding to the current performance mode is subtracted by 1 (S4604), and it is determined whether the value "M" after subtraction is "0" or not (S4605). If it is determined in S4605 that the value "M" after subtraction is not "0" (NO in S4605), the process proceeds to S4607. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value "M" after subtraction is "0" (YES in S4605), the mode status is set to "1" to set the presentation mode to presentation mode A (S4606), and the process proceeds to S4607. In S4607, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets a variable presentation end command to end the presentation symbol game presentation (S4607), and the process ends.

[Special Game Performance Selection Process]
As shown in FIG. 50, in the special game effect selection process (S4410), first, an opening command is analyzed in S4701 (S4701). Next, in S4702, a special game effect pattern selection process is performed to select a pattern (effect mode) of a special game effect to be executed during a special game (big win game or small win game) based on the analyzed opening command (S4702). This special game effect includes an opening effect executed during an opening period before the opening of the big prize winning hole accompanying the start of a special game, and a post-start effect executed during the opening of the big prize winning hole and during the interval between the openings (between rounds). Next, in S4703, an opening effect start command for starting a special game effect based on the special game effect pattern selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is set (S4703), and the process is terminated.

When the opening performance start command set in S4703 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening performance image from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As the opening performance, for example, a performance indicating that a right-hand hit game will be played is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, as the special game performance selected when a special game is executed as the 2R third big win or small win, it is preferable to select one that displays on the display screen 7a in the opening performance that the game ball will be launched (right-hand hit game will be played) aiming at the second big win device 36 (second big win opening 35). In other words, at a predetermined timing (opening period) before the second big win device 36 (second big win opening 35) opens, a performance is performed that notifies the player that a right-hand hit game should be started in advance. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a game ball will enter the second large prize opening 35 during the short opening time of the second large prize opening 35, which is a total of 1.8 seconds. In contrast, when a special game is played as a 15R first jackpot, an opening performance that does not include such a notification (a notification that the ball should continue to be hit to the right before the second large prize opening 35 opens) is selected. Note that, even when a special game related to a 2R third jackpot or small jackpot is played, an opening performance that does not include such a shooting notification may be selected.

[Ending production selection process]
As shown in FIG. 51, in the ending performance selection process (S4412), first, in S4801, the ending command is analyzed (S4801). Next, in S4802, the mode status change process (S4802) is performed. In the mode status change process (S4802), if the currently executed special game is a jackpot game related to the 15R second jackpot, the mode status is set to "2". Also, if the currently executed special game is a jackpot game related to the 15R first jackpot and there is no V passing during the V effective period, the mode status is set to "2". Also, if the currently executed special game is a jackpot game related to the 15R first jackpot and there is a V passing during the V effective period, the mode status is set to "3". Also, if the currently executed special game is a jackpot game related to the 2R third jackpot or small jackpot (jackpot game), the mode status is set to "4" or "5". The initial value of the mode status is "1".

By changing (setting) the mode status in this way, the presentation mode in the presentation pattern game presentation that is executed in conjunction with the changing display of the special pattern after the special game (jackpot game, winning game) ends is set to the presentation mode that corresponds to the changed (set) mode status. In other words, if the special pattern hit/miss judgment results in a 15R first jackpot and there is a V pass during the V valid period of that special game, presentation mode C will be executed in conjunction with the first (first) changing display of the special pattern after the special game ends. This notifies the player that the current game state is a high probability state.

Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss determination is a 2R 3rd big hit or a small hit, presentation mode D or E will be executed in conjunction with the initial (first) display of the special pattern after the end of that special play. This notifies the player that the current game state may be a high probability state or a low probability state, i.e., that there is a possibility of a high probability state. Furthermore, presentation mode D or E is a high probability state if it is after a special play related to a 2R 3rd big hit, but since there is a possibility of a low probability state if it is after a special play related to a small hit, the player cannot definitively determine that it is a high probability state. Therefore, this presentation mode can also be called a probability non-notification mode.

Furthermore, in the mode status change process (S4802), in order to set an upper limit on the number of times the special symbol changes in the changed presentation mode, the upper limit number is set to the value "M" of the presentation mode counter corresponding to the changed presentation mode. Specifically, when setting presentation mode B, the value "Mb" of the presentation mode counter is set to 100 (when there is a second jackpot in 15R and no V passes during the V valid period) or 140 (when there is a first jackpot in 15R and no V passes during the V valid period). Also, when setting presentation mode C, the value "Mc" of the presentation mode counter is set to 140. Also, when setting presentation mode D or E, the value "Md" or "Me" of the presentation mode counter is set to 30.

Next, in S4803, the performance control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status (S4803), and then, in S4804, an ending performance pattern selection process is performed to select the performance pattern (performance mode) of the ending performance based on the analyzed ending command and the referred mode status (S4804). Note that an ending performance is a performance that is executed during the ending period after all the large prize opening processes in a special game have been completed. Then, in S4805, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets an ending performance start command to start an ending performance based on the selected ending performance pattern (S4805), and ends the process.

When the ending performance start command set in S4805 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined ending performance image from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, in this embodiment, when a special game related to the first big win in 15R is played and a V is passed during the V valid period, a performance in which the text "Entering performance mode C" is displayed on the display screen 7a is selected as the ending performance. Also, as the ending performance for the special game related to the third big win or small win in 2R, one in which the text "Entering performance mode D" or "Entering performance mode E" is displayed on the display screen 7a is selected.

As explained in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 1 provides a specific flag that determines whether the processing volume of control related to game presentation, excluding the game presentation determination process of the sub-control unit, is large, and at a specific time (during execution of the ball entry presentation start process) when the processing volume of control related to game presentation is determined to be larger than a predetermined volume, the specific flag is turned ON, and when the specific flag is ON, a control process with a low processing volume (low control load) is performed as the game presentation determination process, making it possible to prevent the load on the sub-control unit from becoming excessive. Also, when the specific flag is OFF, a control process with a higher processing volume (higher control load) is performed as the game presentation determination process than when the specific flag is ON, making it possible to execute a variety of highly creative game presentations.

This allows the control load (control state) of the sub-control unit to balance the processing load between the amount of game presentation decision processing and the amount of control related to game presentation other than that, making it possible to execute a variety of game presentations without placing an excessive load on the game presentation control unit.
This enables optimal control of game presentation. In addition, by providing a unique configuration not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to achieve unique effects not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines, or effects that are more remarkable than those of conventional pachinko gaming machines.

Next, a pachinko gaming machine of Example 2 will be described, which differs from Example 1 in the advance notice performance setting process and the advance notice determination table for a high load state (specific flag is ON). In Example 2, when the load is low (specific flag is OFF), the advance notice performance to be executed is determined based on the advance notice determination table for a low load state shown in FIG. 52, which is the same as Example 1. On the other hand, when the load is high (specific flag is ON), unlike Example 1, the advance notice performance to be executed is determined based on the advance notice determination table for a high load state shown in FIG. 56.

The notice determination table for the high load state in Example 2 is, as shown in FIG. 56, only the cut-in notice determination table, and the notice performance type to be determined (executable) is only the cut-in notice. On the other hand, the notice determination table for the low load state is, as shown in FIG. 52, a conversation notice determination table, a step-up notice determination table, a cut-in notice determination table, and a moving part notice determination table, and the notice performance types to be determined (executable) are four types: conversation notice, step-up notice, cut-in notice, and moving part notice. That is, in the high load state in Example 2, the number of notice performance types to be determined by the sub-control unit (notice performance determination unit) is reduced compared to the low load state (four types → one type). Also, in the high load state, it can be said that the executable notice performance type is fixed to one type. This makes it possible to significantly reduce the amount of processing in the notice performance determination process, and makes it possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessive when the control load of the sub-control unit is high.

In addition, in the high load state in Example 2, when it is determined that a preview performance is to be executed, the number of executable preview performance types is reduced compared to the low load state, and a specific preview performance type (cut-in preview performance) is executed, but the number of (executable) game performances included in the specific preview performance type remains at three, which is no different from the preview determination table for the low load state, and therefore has a certain effect in terms of diversifying game performances, making it possible to ensure interest in the game.

Next, the notice performance setting process (S4506) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54 and FIG. 55. First, in S4951, it is determined whether or not the specific flag is ON (S4951). If it is determined that the specific flag is ON, that is, that the load state is high (YES in S4951), the notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56 is set (S4974) without executing the conversation notice determination, step-up notice determination, moving part notice determination, etc., and the process proceeds to S4967. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the specific flag is ON, no matter what kind of information the fluctuation pattern information is (even if it is information related to a big win), the conversation notice performance, step-up notice performance, and moving part notice performance are not executed. In addition, when the specific flag is ON, the process proceeds to S4967 without executing the processes of S4952 to S4965, so that the processing amount of the notice performance setting process (game performance determination process) can be significantly reduced, and it is possible to prevent the control load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4951 that the specific flag is not ON (NO in S4951), the advance notice decision table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is set (S4973). Next, a process related to a conversation advance notice decision is executed to determine whether or not a conversation advance notice performance is to be executed (S4952 to S4956). This process, like the advance notice performance setting process in Example 1 (see FIG. 46), determines whether or not a conversation advance notice performance is to be executed based on the advance notice decision table shown in FIG. 52, and if so, which advance notice performance is to be executed, and a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, in S4957, processing is performed related to the step-up preview judgment to determine whether or not to execute a step-up preview performance (S4957 to S4961). This processing is also a control processing similar to the preview performance setting processing (see FIG. 46) of Example 1, and therefore a detailed explanation is omitted. Next, in S4962, processing is performed related to the moving part preview judgment to determine whether or not to execute a moving part preview performance (S4962 to S4966). This processing is also a control processing similar to the preview performance setting processing (see FIG. 46) of Example 1, and therefore a detailed explanation is omitted.

In this way, in Example 2, three of the four preview performance types (conversation preview performance type, step-up preview performance type, and moving part preview performance type) are subject to determination (by the preview performance determination unit) in the preview performance setting process only in a low-load state (specific flag OFF state). Multiple preview performances with different execution modes, including these four preview performance types, are stored in the preview performance storage unit (sub-control unit). This makes it possible to diversify the variation of game performances in a low-load state and execute highly creative game performances without excessively increasing the control load on the sub-control unit.

Next, in S4967, a cut-in notice determination is performed. When the specific flag is ON, it is determined whether or not to execute a cut-in notice performance and which cut-in notice performance to execute based on the cut-in notice determination table for high load state shown in FIG. 56 set in S4974 (S4967). Also, when the specific flag is OFF, it is determined whether or not to execute a cut-in notice performance and which cut-in notice performance to execute based on the cut-in notice determination table shown in FIG. 52 (C) set in S4973 (S4967). Next, in S4968, it is determined whether or not to execute a cut-in notice (S4968), and if it is determined that a cut-in notice is to be executed (YES in S4968), a cut-in notice flag indicating that a cut-in notice is to be executed is turned ON (S4969), the determined cut-in notice performance is set (S4970), and the process proceeds to S4972. On the other hand, if it is determined that a cut-in preview performance will not be executed (NO in S4968), the cut-in preview flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it is left OFF) (S4971), and the process proceeds to S4972. S4972 is a control process similar to the preview performance setting process in Example 1 (see FIG. 46), and therefore a detailed explanation is omitted.

As explained above, in Example 2, when the sub-control unit determines that the amount of processing required for control related to game presentations excluding the preview presentation determination process is greater than a predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is ON, the number of preview presentation types that can be determined in the preview presentation determination table for high load states is reduced and fixed to a specific preview presentation type (cut-in preview presentation in Example 2). This makes it possible to significantly reduce the amount of processing required for the preview presentation determination process and prevent the control load on the sub-control unit from becoming excessive.

Next, a pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the time when the control of the sub-control unit with respect to the game presentation is deemed to be greater than a predetermined amount, i.e., when the specific flag is turned ON, is different from the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the specific flag is turned ON as a high load state during the ball entry presentation start process (S4402) performed when the sub-control unit receives a start ball entry command from the main control unit. In the third embodiment, the low load state is when a special game (jackpot game) is being played, and the high load state is when no special game is being played. Note that the high load state may be when no special game is being played, and when the display of the presentation pattern (special pattern) is changing and when the control process related to the display of the presentation pattern (special pattern) is being executed (such a period is also referred to as "during the display change process").

During the execution of a jackpot game, the effects for the jackpot game, such as round effects, are executed, but since the display of the effect patterns (special patterns) is not performed, predetermined control processes with high control loads, such as the variable effect start process and the variable effect end process, are not executed. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the control process load of the sub-control unit is lower during the jackpot game compared to "during variable display processing." Therefore, during the variable display processing, a specific flag is turned ON to indicate a high load state, and during the execution of a jackpot game, the specific flag is turned OFF to indicate a low load state. Then, when this specific flag is ON and when the specific flag is OFF, it is possible to determine the preview effect to be executed based on different preview determination tables. This is the same as in the first and second embodiments.

In this embodiment 3, a preview performance determination process (game performance determination process) is performed at a predetermined timing during special play, for example, when a start ball entry command is received, when a predetermined round (for example, 5R, 10R, etc.) is started, or when a predetermined round is ended. In addition, it is possible to execute the preview performance determined by the preview performance determination process during special play during special play or during the variable display of the performance pattern. Here, the preview performance also includes the above-mentioned pre-performance. And, for example, when a preview performance is determined during special play, the preview performance to be executed may be determined using the preview determination table shown in FIG. 52, and when a preview performance is determined during the variable display process, the preview performance to be executed may be determined using the preview determination table shown in FIG. 53.

In addition, in Example 3, during jackpot play, the preview performance is determined using a preview determination table different from that used during variable display processing, so that it is possible to execute a rehearsal performance that is not subject to determination during variable display processing. Therefore, since there is a dedicated preview performance that can be executed only during jackpot play, it is possible to diversify the execution modes of the game performance during jackpot play and increase the interest in the game.

Next, the process of turning the specific flag ON or OFF in Example 3 will be described with reference to Figures 57 and 58. In Example 3, the specific flag is turned ON by the process at power-on, and when the power is turned on, a state determined to be a high load state is entered. Then, in the special game presentation selection process (S4410) executed with the start of the jackpot game shown in Figure 57, a process of turning the specific flag OFF is performed. This results in a state determined to be a low load state.

[Special Game Performance Selection Process]
As shown in FIG. 57, in the special game performance selection process (S4410), first, the opening command is analyzed (S4701), then the special game performance pattern selection process (S4702), then the opening command performance start command set process (S4703), and then the process proceeds to S4704. The processes of S4701 to S4703 are the same as those of the first embodiment, so detailed explanations will be omitted. Then, in S4704, the specific flag is turned OFF (S4704), and the process ends. By turning OFF the specific flag, it is determined that the special game is being executed in a low load state (first control state). Then, when the notice performance determination process is performed during the special game, it is possible to determine a notice performance that is not executed during the variable display process as a notice performance (game performance). In addition, the notice performance determined during this special game may be executed during the special game. In other words, if the control process can determine a high-load game presentation in a low-load state, it is desirable to execute the game presentation during the low-load state. This makes it possible to execute control related to the optimal game presentation.

[Ending production selection process]
Next, the process of turning the specific flag ON with the end of the special game will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the ending performance selection process (S4412), the specific flag is first turned ON (S4806), and the process proceeds to S4801. This process of turning the specific flag ON determines that the end of the special game is a high-load state (second control state). Then, when the notice performance determination process is performed after the end of the special game, the notice performance is determined using the notice determination table for the high-load state as the notice performance (game performance). In addition, the notice performance determined when the special game is not being performed (high-load state with the specific flag ON) may be executed during that state (state in which the specific flag is ON). If the notice performance determined in the high-load state is executed in the low-load state (during the special game), it becomes impossible to effectively utilize the limited low-load state period in which various notice performances (dedicated notice performances) can be determined (executed). Therefore, it is preferable to execute the notice performance determined in the high-load state during the high-load state.

As explained above, in Example 3, the state during special play is considered to be a low load state, and the determination target is a dedicated preview performance that is not a determination target during the variable display of identification information. This makes it possible to increase interest in play during special play. Note that another aspect of the setting control of the specific flag may be to determine a low load state when the specific flag is ON and a high load state when the specific flag is OFF, and set the specific flag ON during the execution period of the jackpot game.

The pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned Example 3 may also be provided with a preview performance determination unit that determines the game performance to be executed, and a preview performance execution unit that executes the game performance determined by the preview performance determination unit, and may have game performances that are determined by the preview performance determination unit in a low load state (first control state) and that are not determined by the preview performance determination unit in a high load state (second control state).

The game presentation to be determined by the preview presentation determination unit in a low-load state may be different from the game presentation to be determined by the preview presentation determination unit in a high-load state. The preview presentation execution unit may execute the game presentation determined by the preview presentation determination unit in a low-load state in a low-load state. The preview presentation execution unit may execute the game presentation determined by the preview presentation determination unit in a high-load state in a high-load state. The low-load state (first control state) may be a predetermined period when a special game is being played, and the high-load state (second control state) may be a predetermined period when a special game is not being played.

The machine may also have a starting port through which a game ball can enter, and as a control for game presentation (presentation control process), control for game presentation at ball entry that is executed based on the ball entering the starting port, and the low load state may be a predetermined time when control for game presentation at ball entry (presentation control process at ball entry, advance notice presentation control process at ball entry) is being executed, and the high load state may be a predetermined time when control for game presentation at ball entry is not being executed. The machine may also have a control for game presentation at the start of fluctuation that is executed based on the start of the display of fluctuation of the identification information (presentation control process at fluctuation start, advance notice presentation control process at fluctuation start), and the low load state may be a predetermined time when control for game presentation at fluctuation start is being executed, and the high load state may be a predetermined time when control for game presentation at fluctuation start is not being executed.

Next, a pachinko gaming machine of Example 4 will be described. Example 4 differs from Examples 1 and 3 in the time when the sub-control unit's control over game presentation is deemed to be greater than a predetermined amount, i.e., when a specific flag is turned ON. In this Example 4, the state is a high load state while the variable presentation start process is being executed, and the other times are a low load state. The variable presentation start process is a process executed by the sub-control unit when it receives a variable presentation start command from the main control unit, and during this process many processes must be performed, such as a process for obtaining random numbers for presentation determination, a process for selecting a variable presentation pattern, and a process for setting preview presentations, etc., and is therefore considered to be a control process with a relatively large amount of processing.

In this embodiment 4, the specific flag is set to ON while the variable performance start process, which requires a large amount of processing, is being executed, and the specific flag is set to OFF when the variable performance start process is not being executed. In addition, since the preview performance determination process is performed in conjunction with the variable performance start process, the preview performance determination process executed during this variable performance start process determines the preview performance using a preview determination table for a high load state (for the second control state), and the preview performance determination process executed when the variable performance start process is not being executed (for example, during a jackpot game) can determine the preview performance using a preview determination table for a low load state (for the first control state). This prevents the processing load on the sub-control unit from becoming excessive, and also enables the execution of a variety of game performances by controlling the optimal game performance.

[Variable performance start processing]
Next, the process of turning the specific flag ON or OFF in association with the variable performance start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the variable performance start process (S4402), the specific flag is first turned ON (S4508) and the process proceeds to S4501. This process of turning the specific flag ON determines that the variable performance start process is being executed in a high load state (second control state). Then, in the fourth embodiment, when the advance notice performance determination process is executed during the execution of this variable performance start process, the advance notice performance determined using the advance notice determination table for the high load state is executed as the advance notice performance (game performance).

Next, processing is performed in order from S4501 to S4507. These processes are similar to the variable performance start processing of Example 1, so detailed explanations are omitted. Then, following S4507, in S4509, a specific flag is turned OFF (S4509), and processing ends. This process of turning OFF the specific flag determines that the state after variable performance start processing ends (when variable performance start processing is not being performed) is a low load state (first control state). Then, in Example 4, if the preview performance determination process is performed when this variable performance start processing is not being performed, a preview performance determined using the preview determination table for the low load state will be executed as the preview performance (game performance).

As explained above, in Example 4, the high load state is when the variable performance start process is being executed, and the low load state is when the variable performance start process is not being executed, and the preview performance to be executed is determined using different preview decision tables in these states. Also, in the low load state, a dedicated preview performance that is not determined in the high load state is determined as the determination target. This prevents the processing load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive, and enables the execution of a variety of game performances by executing control related to the optimal game performance.

Next, the pachinko game machine of Example 5 will be described. FIG. 62 shows the pattern arrangement 281L, 281C, 281R of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R of the pachinko game machine of Example 5. As in Example 1, the stop mode (winning stop mode, losing stop mode) of the performance patterns of Example 5 is composed of three-digit (three pieces) performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. The pattern arrangement 281L (281) shown in FIG. 62(a) is the pattern that constitutes the left performance pattern 8L in the stopping mode. Also, the pattern arrangement 281C shown in FIG. 62(b) is the pattern that constitutes the middle performance pattern 8C in the stopping mode. Also, the pattern arrangement 281R shown in FIG. 62(c) is the pattern that constitutes the right performance pattern 8R in the stopping mode.

The left pattern 8R is the one selected from the left pattern array 281L. The left pattern array 281L is composed of nine (nine types) of patterns: "0, 1, 2, 0, 4, 5, 6, 0, 8". The left pattern array 281L displays the pattern 8L of the left pattern array 281L in a repeating manner from top to bottom in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 0 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 0 → 8 on the left side of the display screen 7a. The left pattern array 281L has three "0" patterns 282 (zero pattern, special pattern, specific pattern) with different display modes. The "0" pattern 282 with a diagonal line display mode is called the first zero pattern 282a. The "0" pattern 282 with a vertical line display mode is called the second zero pattern 282b. The "0" pattern 282 with a horizontal line display mode is called the third zero pattern 282c. In other words, the three (multiple) "0" symbols (zero symbol, special symbol, specific symbol) included in the left symbol array 281L indicate the same numerical information (information), but are displayed in different ways, which the player can distinguish between.

The one performance pattern selected from the middle pattern array 281C becomes the middle performance pattern 8C. The middle pattern array 281C is also composed of nine performance patterns (nine types) like the left pattern array 281L, and has three "0" patterns 282 with different display modes. The one performance pattern selected from the right pattern array 281R becomes the right performance pattern 8R. The right pattern array 281R is also composed of nine performance patterns (nine types) like the left pattern array 281L, and has three "0" patterns 282 with different display modes.

In the embodiment 5, the number of symbols constituting the left pattern array 281L, the middle pattern array 281C, and the right pattern array 281R is the same, and the number of "0" symbols 282 is the same. The embodiment is not limited to this embodiment, and the number of symbols constituting the left pattern array 281L, the middle pattern array 281C, and the right pattern array 281R may be different, and the number of "0" symbols 282 may be different. For example, the number of performance symbols constituting the left pattern array may be nine (nine types), and the number of performance symbols constituting the middle pattern array may be ten (nine types). In addition, the left pattern array and the right pattern array may include the first zero symbol, the second zero symbol, and the third zero symbol, and the middle pattern array may include only the first zero symbol and the second zero symbol as the "0" symbol.

Next, the "0" symbol 282 (zero symbol, special symbol, specific symbol) will be described. The "0" symbols 282, each of which is included in multiple numbers in each symbol array 281, are variable symbols whose display state can change when a specific condition is met. When a specific condition is met, at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the performance symbol, some or all of the "0" symbols 282 included in each symbol array 281 change to symbols (variable symbols, second specific symbols) that were not included in the symbol array 281 until then. Specifically, the symbol array 281 before the specific condition is met (at the start of the variable, before the change) is "0, 1, 2, 0, 4, 5, 6, 0, 8", and the numbers "3" and "7" are not included in the consecutive numbers from 0 to 8, and the symbols in those positions are "0" symbols. Then, based on the specific condition being met, the "0" symbol changes to a "3" and/or a "7" symbol (changing symbol, second specific symbol) that was not included in the symbol arrangement 281 before the change.

In addition, in the execution mode of this embodiment 5, there are multiple change modes (change patterns) in which the "0" symbol 282 changes to the change symbol 283 (second specific symbol, "3" and "7" symbols). FIG. 63 shows an example of the change mode of the left symbol array 281L. In the change mode of FIG. 63(a), the first zero symbol 282a does not change, the second zero symbol 282b changes to the first change symbol 283a ("3" symbol), and the third zero symbol 282c changes to the second change symbol 283b ("7" symbol), and the changed symbol array 281L becomes "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8". Then, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbol 8L of the changed left symbol array 281L is repeatedly displayed in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 from top to bottom.

63(b), the first zero symbol 282a changes to the first changing symbol 283a ("3"), the second zero symbol 282b changes to the first changing symbol 283a ("3") like the first zero symbol 282a, the third zero symbol 282c changes to the second changing symbol 283b ("7"), and the changed symbol arrangement 281L becomes "3, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8". Then, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbol 8L of the changed left symbol arrangement 281L is repeatedly displayed in the order of 3→1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8 from top to bottom. In addition, since it contains multiple first change patterns 283a ("3" patterns), the expectation of the first change pattern 283a ("3" patterns), which has a high probability of winning, stopping and displaying increases, increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the change mode of FIG. 63(c), the first zero symbol 282a, the second zero symbol 282b, and the third zero symbol 282c ("0" symbol) all change to the second change symbol 283b ("7" symbol), and the changed symbol arrangement 281L becomes "7, 1, 2, 7, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8". Then, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbol 8L of the changed left symbol arrangement 281L is repeatedly displayed in the order of 7→1→2→7→4→5→6→7→8 from top to bottom. In addition, since it contains multiple second change symbols 283a ("7" symbols), the expectation of the second change symbol 283b ("7" symbol), which has a high reliability of a jackpot, stopping and displaying is increased, increasing the interest in the game. Although the three patterns shown in Figures 63(a) to (c) have been described, there are other patterns not shown, such as a pattern in which all of the "0" patterns change to the first variable pattern 283a ("3" pattern) and a pattern in which only a portion of the pattern changes to a variable pattern (first variable pattern 283a and/or second variable pattern 283b).

Although examples of the change patterns of the middle pattern array 281C and the right pattern array 281R are omitted, when the left pattern array 281L changes, the middle pattern array 281C and the right pattern array 281R may change in the same manner as the left pattern array 281L, or the left pattern array 281R, the middle pattern array 281C, and the right pattern array 281R may all or partly change in different manners. This causes the player's expectations to differ depending on the change pattern.

Next, the aspects of the game presentation (reach presentation, winning presentation, miss presentation, winning presentation during game, etc.) of the pachinko game machine of the embodiment 5 will be described using FIG. 64 to FIG. 68. In FIG. 64(a), three first presentation reserved 9a ("O" pattern) are displayed in the first presentation reserved display area 9c (first presentation reserved display section) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a. This indicates that there are three pieces of unconsumed information (information such as special pattern hit/miss judgment random number) that are acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20. In addition, one variable pattern 9f is displayed in the variable pattern display area 9e at the bottom center of the display screen 7a with a "O" pattern that is slightly larger than the first presentation reserved 9a. In this variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that a variable display is currently being executed is displayed. And, depending on the display aspect of this variable pattern 9f, it may be possible that the result of the currently executed variable display will be a big hit (stop display with a big hit pattern).

Figure 64(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 64(a) in the same changing display as Figure 64(a). On the left side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the left pattern array 281L are displayed changing from top to bottom. On the center of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the middle pattern array 281C are displayed changing from top to bottom. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the right pattern array 281R are displayed changing from top to bottom.

Figure 64(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 64(b) in the same variable display as Figure 64(b). Figure 64(c) shows a scene in which the "0" symbol (second zero symbol 282b, specific symbol) selected from the left symbol array 281L is displayed as a stopped symbol (provisional stop display) as the left performance symbol 8L, the "0" symbol (second zero symbol 282b, specific symbol) selected from the right symbol array 281R is displayed as a stopped symbol (provisional stop display) as the right performance symbol 8R, and the middle performance symbol 8C shows a scene in which the middle symbol array 281C is displayed as a variable display. That is, Figure 64(c) shows a reach mode in which the "0" symbol 282 (second zero symbol 282b, specific symbol) of the same display mode is displayed as the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R, the remaining middle performance symbol 8C is displayed as a variable display, and the second zero symbol 282b is displayed as a reach pattern. In addition, a game performance notification section 289 is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the word "reach" is displayed on the game performance notification section 289 to indicate that a reach performance is in progress.

Figure 64(d) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 64(c) in the same variable display as Figure 64(c). The display screen 7a shows a scene in which the second zero pattern 282b, which is the same as the left and right performance patterns 8 (reach patterns), is stopped as the center performance pattern 8C, and the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) indicating a jackpot (win) is stopped. Figure 64(e) shows a scene in which the winning notification performance 286 (text display of "jackpot!") is executed based on the stop display (confirmed stop display) of the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) shown in Figure 63(d), and a jackpot is hit and a jackpot game is being played. Figure 64(f) shows a scene in which a jackpot game related to the jackpot reported in Figure 64(e) is being played. A winning symbol 287, which corresponds to the second zero symbol 282b, is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

In this way, when the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop pattern, first specific stop pattern) is formed (stop display, fixed stop display) with all the "0" patterns 282 in the same display mode, a jackpot is obtained and a special bonus (first bonus) for a jackpot game is awarded. Similarly, when the first zero pattern 282a, the third zero pattern 282c, the variable patterns (first variable pattern 283a, second variable pattern 283b), and other performance patterns ("1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8") form a stop pattern with three of the same performance patterns, the stop pattern becomes a winning pattern arrangement 284, and a special bonus (first bonus) for a jackpot game is awarded. In addition, a mode in which two of the same performance patterns 8 are displayed and one is displayed in a variable manner is called a reach mode, and the two stop patterns that form a reach mode are called reach patterns.

Figure 65 (g) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 64 (b) in the same variable display as Figure 64 (b). On the left side of the display screen 7a, the "0" symbol (second zero symbol 282b, specific symbol) selected from the left symbol array 281L is displayed as the left performance symbol 8L (temporarily stopped), the "0" symbol (first zero symbol 282a, specific symbol) selected from the right symbol array 281R is displayed as the right performance symbol 8R (temporarily stopped), and the middle performance symbol 8C shows a scene in which the middle symbol array 281C is being displayed as a variable display. That is, Figure 65 (g) shows a reach mode in which the "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol) in a different display mode is displayed as the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R, the remaining middle performance symbol 8C is being displayed as a variable display, and the second zero symbol 282b and the first zero symbol 282a are the reach symbols.

The game performance notification section 289 also displays the word "reach" to indicate that a reach performance is in progress. In this way, whether the zero symbols 282 are in the same display mode or different display modes, when two zero symbols 282 are displayed stationary and one is displayed variably, this mode is a reach mode. Each symbol array 281 in this embodiment 5 includes multiple "0" symbols 282 (zero symbols, special symbols, specific symbols), and the "0" symbols 282 constitute a reach mode regardless of the combination of display modes. Therefore, the player can feel that the reach mode is more likely to occur compared to the number of performance symbols 8 that constitute the symbol array 281. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

Figure 65 (h) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed from Figure 65 (g) in the same variable display as Figure 65 (g). Display screen 7a shows a scene in which a "0" pattern 282 (specific pattern, third zero pattern 282c) that is the same as the left and right performance patterns 8 (reach patterns, "0" pattern 282) is stopped (provisionally stopped) as the center performance pattern 8C. As a result, all of the performance patterns that make up the stopped display mode become "0" patterns 282 (specific patterns). However, although the three patterns ("0" pattern 282, specific patterns) that make up the stopped display mode (provisionally stopped display mode) display the same numerical information (information) "0", their display modes are different. This type of stop display pattern is called a "transitional pattern arrangement (specific stop pattern, second specific stop pattern)" and even if the display pattern is different, if the performance patterns that make up the stop display pattern are all "0" patterns 282 (specific patterns), a specified bonus (second bonus) will be awarded.

When all the performance symbols constituting the stop display mode are "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols), and at least one of the performance symbols constituting the stop display mode has a different display mode from the other "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols), the bonus (second bonus) that is awarded is the execution of a "special game performance (second reach performance 302, second game performance, high reliability performance)" that has a higher jackpot reliability than other game performances. In this embodiment 5, when all the performance symbols constituting the stop display mode are "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols), different bonuses (jackpot game, small jackpot game, execution of special game performance, etc.) are awarded depending on whether all the "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols) have the same display mode or whether some of the "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols) have a different display mode from the other "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols).

Figure 65(i) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 65(h) in the same variable display as Figure 65(h). Figure 65(i) shows a scene during which a pattern change performance 288 is being performed in which three "0" symbols 282 in different display modes, stopped (temporarily stopped) on the display screen 7a, change to other performance symbols. The pattern change performance 288 is a performance that is performed when the three symbols that make up the stopped display mode (temporarily stopped display mode) become "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols, transitional pattern arrangement) in different display modes. In the pattern change performance 288, a performance is performed in which the stopped "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols) change to a symbol (changing symbol 283) different from the "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols).

In addition, in this execution mode, the changing pattern 283 that changes due to the pattern change performance 288 is a pattern that is not included in the pattern arrangement 281 that was previously displayed, so the player can easily recognize that the pattern has changed (the pattern change performance has been executed). Figure 65 (j) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 65 (i) in the same changing display as Figure 65 (i). As shown in Figure 65 (j), the pattern change performance 288 is executed, and the second zero pattern 282b of the left pattern constituting the stopped display mode changes to the first changing pattern 283a indicating the number information (information) of "3", the third zero pattern 282c of the middle pattern changes to the second changing pattern 283b indicating the number information (information) of "7", and the first zero pattern 282a of the right pattern changes to the first changing pattern 283a indicating the same number information (information) of "3" as the left pattern.

65(k) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 65(j) in the same variable display as FIG. 65(j). FIG. 65(k) shows a scene in which the variable display of the middle performance pattern 8C (middle pattern arrangement 281C) has started with the changed left and right variable patterns 283 (first variable pattern 283a) in a reach state as a result of the pattern change performance 288. The middle pattern arrangement 281C includes the first variable pattern 283a, which is the same as the reach pattern, including the second variable pattern 283b ("7" pattern) shown in the figure. The game performance notification section 289 in the upper left of the display screen 7a displays the characters "SP reach" indicating that it is a special reach. In this embodiment, the "SP reach" is set as a game performance with a higher probability of winning than the "reach" (normal reach). Therefore, when the "SP reach" is executed, the player's expectation of a big win increases and his interest in the game increases.

In addition, in this embodiment 5, when the change pattern 283 (first change pattern 283a) becomes a reach state and a reach effect (game effect) is executed, the execution of a game effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability (second reach effect 302, second game effect, high reliability effect) is confirmed. That is, in both cases where the reach effect is executed with the first change pattern 283a ("3" pattern) which is the change pattern 283 as the reach pattern, and where the reach effect is executed with the second change pattern 283b ("7" pattern) which is the change pattern 283 as the reach pattern, a game effect with a high jackpot reliability (second reach effect 302, second game effect, high reliability effect) is executed. Therefore, the player's expectation of a jackpot is heightened by the execution of the pattern change effect 288 and the execution of the reach effect with the change pattern 283 as the reach pattern, and his/her interest in the game is heightened.

Figure 65 (l) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 65 (k) in the same variable display as Figure 65 (k). The display screen 7a shows a scene during execution of the second reach performance 302 (second game performance) in which the left and right changing patterns 283 (first changing pattern 283a) are in a reach state and the middle performance pattern 8C (middle pattern arrangement 281C) is displayed in a relatively slow moving manner. Figure 66 (m) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 65 (l) in the same variable display as Figure 65 (l). The display screen 7a shows a scene during execution of the second reach performance 302 (second game performance) in which the left and right changing patterns 283 (first changing pattern 283a) are in a reach state and the middle performance pattern 8C (middle pattern arrangement 281C) is displayed in a relatively slow moving manner.

Figure 66(n) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 66(m) in the same variable display as Figure 66(m). On the display screen 7a, after the second reach effect 302 (second game effect) is executed for a predetermined time, the first variable pattern 283a, which is the same as the reach pattern, is displayed as the middle effect pattern 8C, and the display mode becomes the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode). This allows the player to recognize that a jackpot has been confirmed, and increases the interest in the game. Figure 66(o) shows that a winning notification effect (fanfare effect) is performed based on the winning pattern arrangement 284 (jackpot effect pattern) being displayed in Figure 66(n), and a jackpot game in which the player is awarded a game profit (prize balls) is now being executed.

Figure 66 (p) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 66 (m) in the same variable display as Figure 66 (m). On the display screen 7a, after the second reach performance 302 (second game performance) is executed for a predetermined time, a "4" pattern different from the reach pattern is displayed as the middle performance pattern 8C, and the stopped display mode becomes the miss pattern arrangement 291 (not confirmed at this point). This allows the player to recognize that it will be a miss. Thus, in this execution mode, the second reach performance 302 is a game performance with a relatively high jackpot reliability, but there are cases where it will be a jackpot and cases where it will be a miss. Here, the jackpot reliability (possibility of executing a jackpot game) when the second reach performance is executed is set to 40%. Note that the second reach performance 302 may be the reach performance with the highest jackpot reliability among the reach performances of this pachinko game machine, or it may have other reach performances with a higher jackpot reliability.

Figure 66(q) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 66(p) in the same variable display as Figure 66(p). Figure 66(q) shows a scene where a performance is executed to return the losing pattern arrangement ("343") including the changing pattern displayed in Figure 66(p) to the performance pattern before the change. The pattern arrangement at the start of the variable display does not include the changing pattern (second specific pattern), and since the specific performance pattern ("0" pattern, specific pattern) changed to the changing pattern 283 during the execution of the variable display, a return display is performed to return the changing pattern to the performance pattern before the change, i.e., the "0" pattern 282, before the losing pattern arrangement is displayed as a fixed stop. This allows the player to reconfirm which performance pattern has changed to a changing pattern and the "SP reach" with a high probability of winning has been executed, and it is possible to look forward to the stop display of the "0" pattern even after the next variable display, and to increase the interest in the game. This also allows the player to recognize that a miss has been confirmed.

Figure 66 (r) shows the scene in Figure 66 (q) where the losing symbol array 291 ("040") is displayed as a confirmed stop and the variable display of the next performance symbol has begun. Thus, in this execution mode, the reach performance in which the "0" symbol 282 in a different display mode is the reach symbol, displays the "0" symbol 282 as a middle performance symbol, i.e., displays the transition symbol array 285 (specific stop mode, second specific stop mode) as a stopped stop, and then executes a "special game performance (second reach performance 302, second game performance, high reliability performance)"; and displays the losing symbol array 291 as a stopped stop to confirm the loss, and then does not execute the special game performance in the same variable display.

Figure 67(a) shows a scene in which a variable display of a specified performance pattern is being executed. The left pattern array 281L, the middle pattern array 281C, and the right pattern array 281R are all being displayed in a variable manner. Figure 67(b) shows a scene after a specified time has passed since Figure 67(a) in the same variable display as Figure 67(a). Figure 67(b) shows a scene in which a pattern change performance 288 has started at a specified timing during the variable display, in which a "0" pattern 282 (zero pattern, special pattern, specific pattern) included in each pattern array 281 can change to a variable pattern 283 (second specific pattern).

Figure 67(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 67(b) in the same variable display as Figure 67(b). Display screen 7a shows a scene in which the pattern change performance 288 started in Figure 67(b) is continuing and a predetermined "0" pattern 282 (first zero pattern, second zero pattern, third zero pattern) is about to change to a change pattern 283 (second specific pattern, first change pattern, second change pattern). Although not shown, the result of executing the pattern change performance may include cases where the "0" pattern changes to a change pattern and cases where it does not change to a change pattern. In other words, the pattern change performance may fail.

Figure 67(d) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 67(c) in the same variable display as Figure 67(c). Figure 67(d) shows a scene in which the pattern change performance 288 being executed in Figure 67(c) has succeeded and the "0" symbol has changed to a variable symbol. As described above, the pattern in which the "0" symbol changes to a variable symbol includes a pattern in which a reach performance is executed with the "0" symbol as a reach symbol, a transitional symbol array that constitutes a stop display mode with the "0" symbol having a different display mode is stopped and then changed to a variable symbol. In addition to such a change pattern, this execution mode has a pattern in which a pattern change performance occurs at a predetermined timing during the variable display without going through the stop display of the transitional symbol array, and the "0" symbol changes to a variable symbol. Note that when a pattern change performance is executed through a transitional symbol array, it is also possible to have no failure pattern in which the "0" symbol does not change to a variable symbol (it always changes).

Figure 67(e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 67(d) in the same variable display as Figure 67(d). Figure 67(e) shows a scene where the second reach effect 302 has started, with the "7" symbol (second change symbol 283b) of the change symbol 283 as the reach symbol. The game effect notification section 289 displays the characters "SP reach", indicating that it is a special reach. In addition, a reliability notification section 292 (jackpot reliability notification section, special game execution possibility notification section) is provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In addition, five ★ symbols are displayed in the reliability notification section 292, visually indicating to the player that the jackpot reliability is high. The number of ★ symbols in the reliability notification section 292 can range from 1 to 5, depending on the reach effect to be executed, and the more ★ symbols there are (maximum 5), the higher the jackpot reliability is indicated to the player. Also, in this execution mode, the reach effect in which the varying symbols are reach symbols will be executed with a relatively high probability of winning.

Figure 67(f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 67(e) in the same variable display as Figure 67(e). On the display screen 7a, after the second reach effect 302 (second game effect) has been executed for a predetermined time, the second variable pattern 283b, which is the same as the reach pattern, is displayed as the intermediate effect pattern 8C, and the display pattern becomes the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop pattern, first specific stop pattern) ("777"). This allows the player to recognize that a jackpot has been confirmed, increasing his interest in the game.

Figure 68 (g) shows a scene in which the first reach effect (first game effect, low reliability effect) is being executed in the variable display of the predetermined effect pattern, with the reach pattern being the "4" pattern 8. The game effect notification section 289 displays the word "reach" indicating that it is a normal reach, and the reliability notification section displays two ★ symbols, indicating a lower jackpot reliability than the second reach effect. Here, the jackpot reliability (possibility of executing a jackpot game) when the first reach effect is executed is set to 5%. Figure 68 (h) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 68 (g) in the same variable display as Figure 68 (g). After the second reach effect 302 (second game effect) is executed for a predetermined time, the "0" pattern 282b, which is different from the reach pattern, is stopped and displayed as the middle effect pattern 8C, and the stopped display mode becomes the miss pattern arrangement 291 (determined miss pattern arrangement).

Figure 68(i) shows a scene in which the second zero symbol 282b is displayed as the left and right performance symbols during the variable display of a predetermined performance symbol, and a reach performance is being executed with the second zero symbol 282b as the reach symbol. Also, Figure 68(j) shows a scene in which the first zero symbol 282a is displayed as the left performance symbol 8L during the variable display of a predetermined performance symbol, and the third zero symbol 282c is displayed as the right performance symbol 8R during the variable display of a predetermined performance symbol, and a reach performance is being executed with the zero symbol 282 in a different display mode as the reach symbol. In this way, in principle, the reach performance is executed with the same performance symbol as the reach symbol, but only for the zero symbol 282, it is possible to execute the reach performance with the zero symbol 282 as the reach symbol even if the display mode is different. This makes the player feel that the reach performance is highly likely to occur, and the player can increase his or her expectations for winning a bonus.

[Blink Stock Effects]
Next, the blinking stock effect 296 (stock effect), which is a game effect possessed by the pachinko game machine of this embodiment 5, will be described with reference to Figures 69 to 71. Here, the blinking stock effect 296 is an effect in which a predetermined pattern (eyes) appears on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display, and the predetermined pattern (eyes) performs a predetermined effect (blinks), thereby determining that a special effect (stop display of a zero pattern) will occur at a predetermined timing thereafter (stocking the occurrence of a special effect). In addition, by executing a predetermined effect multiple times, it is also possible to determine (stock) the occurrence of a special effect multiple times depending on the number of times.

In Figure 69(a), three first effect holds 9a (circle symbols) are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display section) in the lower left of the display screen 7a. This indicates that there are three pieces of unconsumed information (information such as random numbers for determining whether a special symbol has been hit) that have been acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20. Figure 69(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 69(a) in the same variable display as Figure 69(a). A symbol resembling an eye (eye symbol 299) appears roughly in the center of the display screen 7a, and a scene is shown in which the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is small in size in the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Figure 69(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 69(b) in the same variable display as Figure 69(b). Figure 69(c) shows a scene in which the blink stock effect 296 being executed in Figure 69(b) continues to be executed, and the eye picture 299 changes from an open eye state to a closed eye state, that is, the eye picture 299 blinks. This "blink effect" stocks the occurrence of the subsequent special effect. Also, in the blink stock effect 296, when the eye picture 299 closes its eyes, one line display (one line in total, both above and below) appears in the stock count display section 298 in the upper left and lower right of the display screen 7a. This line display indicates the stock count of the occurrence of the subsequent special effect, and the player can recognize the number of stocks of the special effect by checking this number of lines.

Figure 69(d) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 69(c) in the same variable display as Figure 69(c). Figure 69(d) shows a scene in which the blink stock effect 296 being executed in Figure 69(c) continues to be executed, and the eye pattern 299 has changed to an eye-open state again. Figure 69(e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 69(d) in the same variable display as Figure 69(d). Figure 69(e) shows a scene in which the blink stock effect 296 being executed in Figure 69(d) continues to be executed, and the eye pattern 299 has changed from an eye-open state to an eye-closed state. Figure 69(e) shows a scene in which the eye pattern 299 has blinked a second time in the blink stock effect 296 being executed, and a second line display is displayed in the stock count display section 298 in the upper left and lower right of the display screen 7a.

Figure 69(f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 69(e) in the same variable display as Figure 69(e). Figure 69(f) shows a scene in which the blinking stock effect 296 being executed in Figure 69(e) continues to be executed, and the eye pattern 299 has changed to an open eye state again. Figure 70(g) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 69(f) in the same variable display as Figure 69(f). The stock count display section 298 on the display screen 7a displays two lines indicating that the stock count is two. That is, during the variable display being executed, or in the variable display related to the pending execution executed thereafter, the stocked special effect is executed. Note that although the eye pattern is not displayed, two lines are displayed in the stock count display section 298, and it can be said that the blinking stock effect 296 is being executed continuously even in this scene. The same is true for Figures 70(h) and (i).

On the display screen 7a, a scene is shown in which a "4" symbol is displayed as the left performance symbol 8L, and the right pattern arrangement 281R and the middle pattern arrangement 281C are displayed in a variable manner. Figure 70(h) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 70(g) in the same variable display as Figure 70(g). On the display screen 7a, a scene is shown in which a losing symbol arrangement 291 (confirmed losing symbol arrangement) consisting of a "4" symbol as the left performance symbol 8L, a "5" symbol as the right pattern arrangement 281R, and a "5" symbol as the middle pattern arrangement 281C is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, two lines are displayed in the stock count display section 298, indicating that the stock count is two.

Figure 70(i) shows the scene where the next variable display of Figure 70(h) has started. At this time, the stock count display section 298 still shows two lines indicating that the stock count is two. Figure 70(j) shows the same variable display as Figure 70(i) but after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 70(i). On the display screen 7a, the first zero symbol 282a is displayed as the left performance symbol 8L, and at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the center symbol array 281C and the right symbol array 281R, an eye symbol 299 is displayed in the background of the performance symbols to execute the blinking release performance 291 (stock release performance).

The special effect stocked by the blink stock effect 296 in this embodiment is an effect of "displaying a zero symbol (specific symbol) in a stopped state." As shown in FIG. 70(j), the blink release effect 297 is executed when the first zero symbol 282a is displayed as the left performance symbol 8L. If all two stocks are released at this timing, the "0" symbols are displayed as the center performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R, and the stopped display mode becomes a specific stopped mode. In other words, if the "0" symbols displayed in a stopped state by the blink release effect are both the first zero symbol 282a, a jackpot is reached (a first special offer is awarded), and if at least one of them is the second zero symbol 282b or the third zero symbol 282c, a transition to an SP reach is made (a second special offer is awarded).

This makes it possible to diversify the player's expectations for winning a special bonus and increase interest in the game, depending on the number of times the stock is displayed on the stock count display unit 298, the number of "0" symbols stopped and displayed before the stock is released, and the display mode of the "0" symbols. Note that the blink stock effect (stock effect) that stocks special effects and the blink release effect (stock release effect) that starts a stocked special effect are executed when the same specified pattern (eye pattern) executes a specified effect (blink). In other words, both are triggered by the execution of a common effect.

Figure 70(k) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 70(j) in the same variable display as Figure 70(j). Figure 70(k) shows that the blinking release effect 297 shown in Figure 70(j) continues to be executed, and in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, an eye pattern 299 is displayed overlapping the effect pattern 8, and an effect in which the eye pattern 299 closes its eyes is executed. This indicates to the player that the stocked special effect will be released. The stock count display section 298 shows two lines indicating that the stock count is two.

Figure 70(l) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 70(k) in the same variable display as Figure 70(k). Figure 70(l) shows a scene in which the blinking release effect 297 shown in Figure 70(k) continues to be executed, and the third zero pattern 282c is stopped and displayed on the right performance pattern 8R due to the execution of the first blinking release effect. In the stock count display section 298, one line display is erased due to the release of one special effect, and one line display indicating that the remaining number of stocks is one is displayed. In addition, an eye pattern 299 is displayed in the background of the performance pattern 8, indicating that the blinking release effect will continue. Also, at this time, since the display mode of the two "0" patterns that are stopped and displayed is different, the player gives up on the winning pattern arrangement being stopped and shifts his expectation to the transition pattern arrangement being stopped and displayed.

Figure 71 (m) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 70 (l) in the same variable display as Figure 70 (l). In Figure 70 (m), the blinking release effect 297 shown in Figure 70 (l) continues to be executed, and in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, an eye pattern 299 is displayed overlapping the effect pattern 8, and an effect in which the eye pattern 299 closes its eyes is executed. This indicates to the player that the remaining special effect that has been stocked will be released. In other words, at this point, the player can recognize that the stopped display mode will become a transitional pattern arrangement, which increases the player's interest in the game. The stock count display section 298 displays a single line indicating that the stock count is 1.

Figure 71 (n) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 71 (m) in the same variable display as Figure 71 (m). Figure 71 (n) shows a scene in which the blinking release effect 297 shown in Figure 71 (m) continues to be executed, and by executing the second blinking release effect 297, the second zero pattern 282b is stopped and displayed in the middle effect pattern 8C, and the stopped display mode becomes the transitional pattern arrangement 285 (specific stop mode, second specific stop mode). By releasing all the stocks, all the line displays in the stock count display section 298 are erased. In addition, although an eye pattern 299 is displayed in the background of the effect pattern 8, there is no stock for the special effect, which indicates that the blinking release effect has ended. In this way, when the specified zero symbol is displayed as the left performance symbol, a blinking release effect is executed, and this stock release effect executes two special effects (stop display of zero symbols) that were stored in advance, causing the specified zero symbol to be displayed as the center performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R, and successfully changing the stop display mode to a transitional pattern arrangement.

In this way, the blink stock effect is an effect that guarantees the number of times that a special effect will be executed later depending on the number of times it is stocked. The blink release effect may also be executed in the variable display in which the blink stock effect was executed. In this case, the blink stock effect and the blink release effect become game effects that notify the jackpot reliability of the variable display being executed. As shown in this execution mode, the blink release effect may also be executed in the variable display that is executed after the variable display in which the blink stock effect was executed. In this case, the blink stock effect and the blink release effect become advance effects (pre-reading effects) that notify the jackpot reliability before the variable display that is the subject of the notification of the jackpot reliability.

Figure 71(o) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 71(n) in the same variable display as Figure 71(n). Figure 71(o) shows a scene in which, as described above, a pattern change presentation 288 is executed based on the stopped display of the transition pattern arrangement 285 in Figure 71(n), and a special reach (second reach presentation, second game presentation) with the first change pattern 283a as the reach pattern is executed.

[Countdown Reach Performance]
Next, the aspect of the countdown reach effect, which is the game effect of the pachinko game machine of the embodiment 5, will be described with reference to Figs. 72 to 74. In Fig. 72(a), three first effect reserves 9a (images of "O") are displayed in the first effect reserve display area 9c (first effect reserve display section) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. This indicates that there are three pieces of unconsumed information (information such as special pattern hit/miss judgment random numbers) that are acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20. In addition, one variable pattern 9f is displayed in the variable pattern display area 9e at the center of the lower part of the display screen 7a as an image of "O" that is slightly larger than the first effect reserve 9a. In this variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that a variable display is currently being executed is displayed. And, depending on the display aspect of this variable pattern 9f, it may be possible that the result of the currently executed variable display will be a big hit (stop display with a big hit pattern).

Figure 72(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 72(a) in the same variable display as Figure 72(a). On the left side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the left pattern array 281L are displayed varying from top to bottom. On the center of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the middle pattern array 281C are displayed varying from top to bottom. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the right pattern array 281R are displayed varying from top to bottom. Figure 72(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 72(b) in the same variable display as Figure 72(b). Figure 72(c) shows a scene in which the word "reach" is displayed in the game performance notification section 289 in the upper left of the display screen 7a, and a reach performance (countdown reach performance) is being executed.

Also, on the display screen 7a, the left performance pattern 8L and the center performance pattern 8C are displayed as the same performance pattern "2" to form the reach pattern 306, and the right pattern arrangement 281R is displayed as the right performance pattern 8R. In other words, it shows a scene in which two of the three performance patterns match as "2" to form the reach pattern 306, and the remaining performance pattern is displayed as a reach performance. Figure 72 (d) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 72 (c) in the same display as Figure 72 (c). Figure 72 (d) shows a scene in which the right performance pattern 8R, which was displayed as a change in Figure 72 (c), is displayed as the first zero pattern 282a, which is different from the reach pattern 306.

In this way, in the countdown reach performance 305 (special reach performance), a reach performance is executed with a performance pattern other than the specific pattern as the reach pattern, and the remaining performance pattern is a pattern different from the reach pattern, and the stop mode (in this example, "220") when it is stopped and displayed as a specific pattern (zero pattern, first zero pattern, second zero pattern, third zero pattern) is called a re-variable stop mode (special stop mode).

This countdown reach performance 305 is a game performance in which the reach symbol changes multiple times in a predetermined order, and multiple reach performances are performed. In addition, in the countdown reach performance 305, as the reach symbol 306 changes, different benefits are awarded depending on which reach symbol 306 results in a jackpot. In addition, in the countdown reach performance 305, when two of the three performance symbols become predetermined reach symbols and a reach state is reached, if the remaining performance symbol stops and displays the same (matching) performance symbol as the reach symbol, a jackpot is awarded.

When two of the three performance symbols become predetermined reach symbols and reach mode, if the remaining one performance symbol is different from the reach symbol and is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol (zero symbol, first zero symbol, second zero symbol, third zero symbol), the reach symbol is changed and the performance symbol is displayed again. That is, the reach symbol is changed to continue the countdown reach performance 305, and the variable display being executed is continued. When two of the three performance symbols become predetermined reach symbols and reach mode, if the remaining one performance symbol is different from the reach symbol and is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol (zero symbol, first zero symbol, second zero symbol, third zero symbol), the stopped mode becomes a miss pattern arrangement 291 (determined miss pattern arrangement), the countdown reach performance 305 ends, and the variable display being executed ends.

Therefore, in the reach effect in the countdown reach effect 305 (special reach effect), if the remaining effect symbol stops and displays the same effect symbol as the reach symbol, and if the remaining effect symbol is a different effect symbol from the reach symbol but a specific symbol (zero symbol) stops and displays, a gaming benefit (benefit, special game, another reach effect, etc.) is awarded in both cases, so the player feels that there is a high possibility of winning a benefit, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, when the reach symbol is not a specific symbol, if the remaining effect symbol is a different effect symbol from the reach symbol but a specific symbol (zero symbol) stops and displays, the reach symbol is changed and another reach effect is executed, so the player can play with a sense of expectation of receiving a benefit again.

The countdown reach effect 305 starts the reach effect with an effect pattern other than the specific pattern (zero pattern) (in this execution mode, the "2" pattern) as the reach pattern 306, and whenever the reach pattern changes, the reach effect is repeated with the effect pattern obtained by subtracting 1 from the previous reach pattern as the reach pattern. That is, whenever the reach pattern changes, the number (information) indicated by the reach pattern counts down (2 → 1 → 0). In addition, in the execution mode of this embodiment 5, the reach pattern is changed, and the final reach pattern is the specific pattern (zero pattern). Then, when the reach effect is performed with the zero pattern that has become the reach pattern in the final change, and the remaining performance pattern stops and displays with the same specific pattern (zero pattern) as the reach pattern, the stopping mode becomes a winning pattern arrangement, and a more advantageous (greater for the player) benefit is given to the player than when the winning pattern arrangement occurs when the other performance patterns are reach patterns.

Figure 72(e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 72(d) in the same variable display as Figure 72(d). Figure 72(e) shows a scene in Figure 72(d) where the left, center, and right performance symbols have again performed a variable display based on the stop mode of the performance symbols becoming a re-variable stop mode 307 (special stop mode, "220")). Figure 72(f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 72(e) in the same variable display as Figure 72(e). Figure 72(f) shows a scene where the countdown reach performance 305 is still being performed, and the reach pattern 306 has changed (counted down) from "2" to "1" and the remaining performance symbol is performing a variable display for the second reach performance.

Figure 73(g) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 72(f) in the same variable display as Figure 72(f). Figure 73(g) shows a scene in which the countdown reach performance 305 continues to be executed, and the right performance pattern 8R, which was being variable displayed in Figure 72(f), is stopped and displayed as the second zero pattern 282b, which is different from the reach pattern 306. Figure 73(g) shows a scene in which, in the countdown reach performance 305 (special reach performance), a reach performance is executed with a performance pattern other than the specific pattern as the reach pattern, and the remaining performance pattern is stopped and displayed as a specific pattern (zero pattern) different from the reach pattern (in this example, "110"), and the stop mode has become a re-variable stop mode (special stop mode).

Figure 73(h) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 73(g) in the same variable display as Figure 73(g). Figure 73(h) shows a scene in which the countdown reach performance 305 continues to be executed, and the left, center, and right performance symbols execute a variable display again based on the fact that the stop mode of the performance pattern in Figure 73(g) has become the re-variable stop mode 307 (special stop mode, "110"). Figure 73(i) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 73(h) in the same variable display as Figure 73(h). Figure 73(i) shows a scene in which the countdown reach performance 305 continues to be executed, and the reach pattern 306 changes (counts down) from "1" to "0 (specific pattern, zero pattern)" and the remaining one performance pattern executes a variable display for the third reach performance. Also, the change in which the reach pattern becomes a specific pattern is the final stage change in the countdown reach performance 305.

Figure 73(j) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 73(i) in the same variable display as Figure 73(i). Figure 73(j) shows a scene in which the countdown reach performance 305 continues to be executed, and the right performance pattern 8R, which was being displayed in a variable manner in Figure 73(i), stops at the first zero pattern 282a, which is the same as the specific pattern (first zero pattern) that is the reach pattern 306. In other words, the left, center, and right performance patterns all match with the first zero pattern 282a, and the stop pattern is a winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop pattern, first specific stop pattern). In addition, the stopping mode in which the winning symbol arrangement 284 is composed of specific symbols (first zero symbol, second zero symbol, third zero symbol) is called the first winning symbol arrangement 284a, and when the first winning symbol arrangement 284a is stopped and displayed, a relatively advantageous bonus (second special bonus) is awarded to the player.

Here, the benefit (second special benefit) that is relatively advantageous to the player is the 15R first jackpot (15R first jackpot game). Also, the benefit (first special benefit) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player is the 2R third jackpot (2R third jackpot game). Also, the benefit (second special benefit) that is relatively advantageous to the player may be a benefit that has more game profits (prize balls) that can be obtained compared to the benefit (first special benefit) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, or may be a benefit in which the game state after the jackpot game ends is advantageous (such as a high probability state, a high base state, or a long period of execution of these states).

Figure 73 (k) shows a scene in which a first win notification effect 286a ("Super jackpot!") is executed to inform the player that a relatively advantageous bonus (second special bonus) will be awarded based on the stopped display of the first win symbol array 284a in Figure 73 (j). Figure 73 (l) shows a scene in which a jackpot game (15R first jackpot game) related to the jackpot (15R first jackpot) shown in Figures 73 (j) and (k) has started. In addition, a first zero symbol 282a is displayed as the winning symbol 287.

Figure 74 (m) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 72 (c) in the same variable display as Figure 72 (c). Figure 74 (m) shows a scene in which the countdown reach performance 305 continues to be executed, and the right performance pattern 8R, which was being displayed in a variable display in Figure 72 (c), stops and displays the same "2" pattern as the reach pattern 306 (performance pattern other than the specific pattern). In other words, it shows a scene in which the performance patterns on the left, center, and right all match with the "2" pattern, and the stopping mode becomes the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stopping mode, first specific stopping mode). In addition, the stopping mode in which the winning pattern arrangement 284 is composed of the "2" pattern, which is a performance pattern other than the specific pattern, is called the second winning pattern arrangement 284b, and when the second winning pattern arrangement 284b stops and displays, a relatively disadvantageous privilege (first special privilege) is granted to the player.

Figure 74 (n) shows a scene where the second winning notification effect 286b ("Big Win!") is executed to inform the player that a relatively unfavorable bonus (second special bonus) will be awarded based on the second winning pattern arrangement 284b being stopped and displayed in Figure 74 (m). Figure 74 (o) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 72 (f) in the same variable display as Figure 72 (f). Figure 74 (o) shows a scene where the countdown reach effect 305 continues to be executed, and the right performance pattern 8R, which was being displayed in a variable display in Figure 72 (f), is stopped and displayed as the same "1" pattern as the reach pattern 306 (performance pattern other than the specific pattern). In other words, it shows a scene where the left, center, and right performance patterns all match with the "1" pattern, and the stop mode becomes the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode). In addition, a stopping mode in which the winning symbol arrangement 284 is composed of a "1" symbol, which is a performance symbol other than a specific symbol, is called a second winning symbol arrangement 284b.

As in the case where the winning symbol arrangement 284 is composed of the "2" symbol, which is a performance symbol other than the specific symbol, a relatively unfavorable bonus (first special bonus) is awarded to the player. Figure 74 (p) shows a scene in which the second winning notification performance 286b ("Big Win!") is executed to inform the player that a relatively unfavorable bonus (second special bonus) will be awarded, based on the stopped display of the second winning symbol arrangement 284b in Figure 74 (o).

In the countdown reach performance 305, when the winning symbol arrangement is composed of a specific symbol (zero symbol), a more advantageous bonus is given to the player than when the winning symbol arrangement is composed of a performance symbol other than the specific symbol. In addition, even when the winning symbol arrangement is composed of a performance symbol other than the specific symbol, different bonuses may be given depending on the performance symbols that compose the winning symbol arrangement. For example, a more advantageous bonus may be given to the player when the number of changes in the reach symbol in the countdown reach performance is small (for example, the reach symbol is a "2" symbol) (second special bonus) than when the number of changes is large (for example, the reach symbol is a "1" symbol) (third special bonus).

[Pushing and shoving reach effect]
Next, the aspect of the push-to-win reach effect, which is the game effect of the pachinko game machine of the embodiment 5, will be described with reference to Figs. 75 to 79. In Fig. 75(a), three first effect reserves 9a (images of "o") are displayed in the first effect reserve display area 9c (first effect reserve display section) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a. This indicates that there are three pieces of unconsumed information (information such as special pattern hit/miss judgment random numbers) that are acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20. In addition, one variable pattern 9f is displayed in the variable pattern display area 9e at the bottom center of the display screen 7a with a "o" image that is slightly larger than the first effect reserve 9a. In this variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that a variable display is currently being executed is displayed. And, depending on the display aspect of this variable pattern 9f, it may be possible that the result of the currently executed variable display will be a big hit (stop display with a big hit pattern).

Figure 75(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 75(a) in the same variable display as Figure 75(a). On the left side of the display screen 7a, the performance pattern of the left pattern array 281L is displayed variable from above to below. On the center of the display screen 7a, the performance pattern of the middle pattern array 281C is displayed variable from above to below. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the performance pattern of the right pattern array 281R is displayed variable from above to below. Figure 75(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 75(b) in the same variable display as Figure 75(b). Figure 75(c) shows a scene in which the first zero pattern 282a is displayed as the left performance pattern 8L, the first zero pattern 282a that is the same (matching) as the left performance pattern is displayed as the right performance pattern 8R, and the middle pattern array 281C is displayed variable. In other words, the first zero symbol 282a (the "0" symbol) is the reach symbol, and the remaining one middle performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner, indicating a reach state.

Figure 75(d) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 75(c) in the same variable display as Figure 75(c). Figure 75(d) shows a scene where the reach effect executed in Figure 75(c) has become a pushing reach effect 309. The words "Pushing Reach" are displayed in the game effect notification section 289 in the upper left of the display screen 7a, notifying the player that the pushing reach effect 309 has been executed. In addition, below the game effect notification section 289, a reach mode effect pattern with the first zero pattern 282a as the reach pattern is displayed.

Here, the pushing reach effect (display area acquisition reach effect) is a display in which a bar-shaped partition 310 (display area partition) is displayed to divide (divide, separate) the display area on the display screen 7a. Then, a bonus pattern 311a is displayed in the bonus pattern display area 311 on the display screen 7a divided by the partition 310, and a bonus pattern 312b is displayed in the non-bonus pattern display area 312 on the display screen 7a divided by the partition 310. Then, a pushing effect is performed between the bonus pattern display area 311 (the bonus pattern 311a displayed therein) and the non-bonus pattern display area 312 (the non-bonus pattern 312b displayed therein). Then, one effect pattern selected from the effect patterns displayed in the display area (bonus pattern display area or non-bonus pattern display area) on the side that won the pushing effect (satisfied a predetermined condition) is displayed as the (third) effect pattern 8C to be displayed as the last one to be stopped. Or, it is determined whether a bonus is granted.

As shown in FIG. 75(d), the display screen 7a is provided with a bonus symbol display area 311 (first display area) on the upper side of the display screen 7a and a non-bonus symbol display area 312 (second display area) on the lower side of the display screen 7a by a horizontally long bar-shaped partition 310 (display area partition). Here, the bonus symbol display area 311 (first display area) displays a performance pattern 8 that matches the reach symbol 306, and the non-bonus symbol display area 312 (second display area) displays a performance pattern 8 that does not match the reach symbol 306. A performance pattern that "matches the reach symbol" is a performance pattern that, when stopped as the final performance pattern to be stopped, will be awarded a bonus (a big win game, another reach performance, etc.), that is, a winning symbol arrangement (or transition symbol arrangement). Additionally, a performance pattern that "does not match the reach pattern" is one that, if displayed as the final stop pattern, will not award a bonus, i.e., will result in a losing pattern arrangement.

In FIG. 75(d), a push-to-reach performance 309 is being executed with the first zero symbol 282a as the reach symbol 306, and the bonus symbol display area 311 (first display area) displays the performance symbols (first zero symbol 282a, second zero symbol 282b, and third zero symbol 282c) that will be awarded a bonus when stopped. The non-bonus symbol display area 312 (second display area) displays the performance symbols ("1", "2", "4", "5", "6", and "8") that will not be awarded a bonus when stopped. In the push-to-reach performance 309, the bonus symbol display area 311 (first display area) and the non-bonus symbol display area 312 (second display area) push each other up and down (together) while changing the displayed performance symbols, and the display area that has acquired the larger display area wins.

Figure 75(e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 75(d) in the same variable display as Figure 75(d). In Figure 75(e), the push-together reach performance 309 continues to be executed, and the second zero symbol 282b is displayed as the bonus symbol 311a in the bonus symbol display area 311, and the "1" symbol is displayed as the non-bonus symbol 312b in the non-bonus symbol display area 312. In Figure 75(e), the partition 310 moves downward (towards the non-bonus symbol display area), and the bonus symbol display area 311 (the second zero symbol 282b displayed therein) is pushing the non-bonus symbol display area 312 (the "1" symbol displayed therein). In other words, the scene shows that the bonus symbol display area 311 side is dominant. In addition, adjacent to the partition 310, a push-in direction suggestion part 313 indicating the moving direction of the partition 310 (the display area on the pushing side, the pushing direction) is displayed pointing downward. In addition, the effect symbols displayed in the display area of the winning side are displayed larger than the effect symbols displayed in the display area of the losing side. This shows the player which display area is dominant.

Figure 75(f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 75(e) in the same variable display as Figure 75(e). Figure 75(f) shows that the pushing reach effect 309 continues to be executed, and the non-bonus symbol 312b displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area 312 changes from the "1" symbol to the "2" symbol. The partition 310 then moves upward (towards the bonus symbol display area), and the non-bonus symbol 312b displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area 312 pushes back the bonus symbol 311a displayed in the bonus symbol display area 311. The pushing direction suggestion section 313 is also displayed pointing upward.

Figure 76 (g) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 75 (f) in the same variable display as Figure 75 (f). Figure 76 (g) shows that the pushing reach performance 309 continues to be executed, and the bonus symbol 311a displayed in the bonus symbol display area 311 changes from the second zero symbol to the third zero symbol. The partition 310 then moves downward (towards the non-bonus symbol display area), and the bonus symbol 311a displayed in the bonus symbol display area 312 pushes back the non-bonus symbol 312b displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area 311. The pushing direction suggestion section 313 is also displayed pointing downward.

Figure 76 (h) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 76 (g) in the same variable display as Figure 76 (g). Figure 76 (h) shows that the pushing reach performance 309 continues to be executed, and the non-bonus symbol 312b displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area 312 changes from the "2" symbol to the "4" symbol. The partition 310 then moves upward (towards the bonus symbol display area), and the non-bonus symbol 312b displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area 312 pushes back the bonus symbol 311a displayed in the bonus symbol display area 311. The pushing direction suggestion section 313 is also displayed pointing upward.

Figure 76(i) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 76(h) in the same variable display as Figure 76(h). Figure 76(i) shows a scene in which the pushing reach effect 309 continues to be executed, and the bonus symbol 311a displayed in the bonus symbol display area 311 changes from the third zero symbol to the second zero symbol. The partition 310 moves downward (towards the non-bonus symbol display area), and the bonus symbol 311a displayed in the bonus symbol display area 312 pushes back the non-bonus symbol 312b displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area 311. The pushing direction suggestion section 313 is also displayed pointing downward. The scene in which the help character A314 is displayed in the bonus symbol display area 311 (first display area) is also shown.

The help character A314 is a character that appears in the bonus symbol display area at a predetermined timing during the execution of the pushing reach performance, and helps the bonus symbol display area to push into the non-bonus symbol display area and win (satisfy a predetermined condition). When the help character A314 is displayed, the chances of winning are higher compared to when the help character A314 is not displayed, but there may be cases where the help character A314 loses, or it may be guaranteed that the help character A314 will win. Therefore, when the help character A314 is displayed, the player's expectations of a bonus being achieved increase, and their interest in the game increases.

In addition, in this embodiment, help character A314 is shown as an example of a help character, but this is not limited to this. In addition to help character A314, there may be multiple help characters with other display modes (e.g., help characters X, Y, Z). The possibility that the bonus pattern display area will win may differ depending on the type of help character displayed. Also, there may be cases where the bonus pattern display area will always win depending on the type of help character.

Figure 76(j) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 76(i) in the same variable display as Figure 76(i). Figure 76(j) shows a scene in which the pushing reach performance 309 continues to be executed, and the help character A314 pushes the partition 310 towards the non-bonus symbol display area. The partition 310 then moves downward (towards the non-bonus symbol display area), and the bonus symbol 311a displayed in the bonus symbol display area 312 pushes the non-bonus symbol 312b displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area 311. It also shows a scene in which the number of pushing direction suggestion parts 313 has increased, and the bonus symbol display area has become more dominant.

Figure 76 (k) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 76 (j) in the same variable display as Figure 76 (j). Figure 76 (k) shows a scene in which the push-to-match reach performance 309 continues to be executed, and the help character A314 further pushes the partition 310 toward the non-bonus symbol display area side. Such a performance in which the help character A314 assists the victory of the bonus symbol display area side is also called the support performance 318. In addition to the help character, it is possible to display a floating character (e.g., a balloon or a hot air balloon) that assists the partition 310 to move upward, and a weight character (e.g., a weight, etc.) that assists the partition 310 to move downward. Specifically, when a floating character is added to the partition, it assists the partition to move upward, and when a weight character is placed on the partition, it assists the partition to move downward. In addition, by displaying such characters, the player can intuitively recognize in which direction the partition is being guided. Additionally, the likelihood (reliability) that the partition will be guided in a specific direction (assistance direction) may differ depending on the help character, floating character, or weight character.

Figure 76 (l) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 76 (i) in the same variable display as Figure 76 (k). Figure 76 (j) shows a scene in which the push-to-reach performance 309 continues to be executed, the help character A 314 pushes the partition 310 to the non-bonus symbol display area side, and the bonus symbol display area side wins. That is, the bonus symbol 311a (first zero symbol) on the bonus symbol display area 311 side pushes the non-bonus symbol 312b ("4" symbol) on the non-bonus symbol display area 312, and the entire display area becomes the bonus symbol display area. As a result, when the bonus symbol display area side wins, the first zero symbol, which is the bonus symbol displayed in the bonus symbol display area, becomes the last stop symbol in the push-to-reach performance. In this way, when the bonus symbol display area side wins, the stop symbol is selected from the bonus symbols (performance symbols) displayed in the bonus symbol display area.

Figure 77 (m) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 76 (l) in the same variable display as Figure 76 (l). Figure 77 (m) shows a scene in which the pushing reach performance 309 (display area acquisition reach performance) continues to be executed, the bonus symbol display area side acquires the display area and wins (satisfies the predetermined condition), and the third stopped symbol in the pushing reach performance 309 has been determined (confirmed) to be the first zero symbol 282a, which is the bonus symbol 311a. This confirms that the player will be given a predetermined bonus.

Figure 77(n) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 77(m) in the same variable display as Figure 77(m). The display screen 7a shows a scene in which the first zero pattern 282a, which is the same as the left and right performance patterns 8 (reach patterns), is stopped as the center performance pattern 8C, and the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) indicating a jackpot (win) is stopped. Figure 77(o) shows a scene in which the winning notification performance 286 (text display of "jackpot!") is executed based on the stop display (confirmed stop display) of the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) shown in Figure 77(n), and a jackpot is hit and a jackpot game is being played. Figure 77(p) shows a scene in which a jackpot game related to the jackpot reported in Figure 77(o) is being played. A winning symbol 287, which corresponds to the first zero symbol 282a, is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

In this way, when the winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stop pattern, first specific stop pattern) is formed (stop display, fixed stop display) with all the "0" patterns 282 in the same display mode, a jackpot is obtained and a special bonus (first bonus) for a jackpot game is awarded. Similarly, when the second zero pattern 282b, the third zero pattern 282c, the variable patterns (first variable pattern 283a, second variable pattern 283b), and other performance patterns ("1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8") form a stop pattern with three of the same performance patterns, the stop pattern becomes a winning pattern arrangement 284, and a special bonus (first bonus) for a jackpot game is awarded. In addition, a mode in which two of the same performance patterns 8 are displayed and one is displayed in a variable manner is called a reach mode, and the two stop patterns that form a reach mode are called reach patterns.

Figure 77 (q) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 76 (g) in the same variable display as Figure 76 (g). Figure 77 (q) shows a scene in which the pushing reach effect 309 (display area acquisition reach effect) continues to be executed, and the bonus symbol display area 311 side (third zero symbol) further pushes the partition part 310 towards the non-bonus symbol display area side. Also, the number of pushing direction suggestion parts 313 pointing downward has increased, showing a scene in which the bonus symbol display area side has become more dominant.

Figure 77(r) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 77(q) in the same variable display as Figure 77(q). Figure 77(r) shows a scene in which the push-to-reach performance 309 continues to be executed, the bonus symbol display area 311 side (third zero symbol) pushes the partition 310 to the non-bonus symbol display area side, and the bonus symbol display area side wins (satisfies a predetermined condition). In other words, it shows a scene in which the bonus symbol 311a (third zero symbol) on the bonus symbol display area 311 side pushes the non-bonus symbol 312b ("2" symbol) on the non-bonus symbol display area 312, and the entire display area becomes the bonus symbol display area. As a result, when the bonus symbol display area side wins, the third zero symbol, which is the bonus symbol displayed in the bonus symbol display area, becomes the last stopping symbol in the push-to-reach performance.

Figure 78 (s) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 77 (r) in the same variable display as Figure 77 (r). Display screen 7a shows a scene in which a third zero symbol 282c, which has a different display mode from the left and right performance symbols 8 (reach symbols), is stopped as the center performance symbol 8C. As a result, the three stopped symbols match with the "0" symbol 282 (zero symbol) which has a different display mode, and the stopped display mode becomes the transitional symbol arrangement 285 (specific stop mode, second specific stop mode) described above. If the transitional symbol arrangement 285 is stopped as a result of the push-reach performance, then a symbol change performance is executed, and it is determined that a game performance with a relatively high probability of winning will be executed.

Figure 78 (t) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 78 (s) in the same variable display as Figure 78 (s). Figure 78 (t) shows a scene in which a pattern change performance 288 is being performed in which three "0" symbols 282 with different display modes, which are stopped (temporarily stopped) on the display screen 7a, change to other performance symbols. The pattern change performance 288 is a performance that is performed when the three symbols that make up the stopped display mode (temporarily stopped display mode) become "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols, transitional pattern arrangement) with different display modes. In the pattern change performance 288, a performance is performed in which the stopped "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols) change to a symbol (changing symbol 283) different from the "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols). In this embodiment, the execution of this pattern change performance and the subsequent SP reach performance are given as a bonus to the player. In addition, the manner in which the game presentation is executed after the pattern change presentation 288 is the same as in Figures 65 and 66, etc., so a description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 78 (u) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 76 (h) in the same variable display as Figure 76 (h). Figure 78 (u) shows a scene in which the pushing reach effect 309 continues to be executed and the obstructing character B315 is displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area 312 (second display area).

The obstruction character B315 is a character that is displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area at a predetermined timing during the execution of the push-and-pull reach performance, and helps the non-bonus symbol display area to win (satisfy a predetermined condition) by pushing the non-bonus symbol display area into the bonus symbol display area. In other words, it is a character that obstructs the bonus symbol display area from winning (satisfying a predetermined condition). When the obstruction character B315 is displayed, the bonus symbol display area is less likely to win compared to when it is not displayed, but the bonus symbol display area may win or may always lose. Therefore, when the obstruction character B315 is displayed, the player's expectation of the bonus being achieved decreases. Therefore, the player plays the game in the hope that the help character will be displayed on the bonus symbol display area side.

In addition, in this embodiment, the obstruction character B315 is shown as an example of the obstruction character, but this is not limited to this. In addition to the obstruction character B315, there may be a plurality of obstruction characters of other display modes (e.g., obstruction characters X, Y, Z). The possibility that the bonus pattern display area will win (the possibility that the non-bonus pattern display area will win) may be varied depending on the type of obstruction character displayed. Also, there may be cases where the bonus pattern display area will always win depending on the type of obstruction character.

Figure 78 (v) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 78 (u) in the same variable display as Figure 78 (u). Figure 78 (v) shows a scene in which the pushing reach effect 309 continues to be executed, and the obstructing character B315 pushes the partition 310 further towards the bonus symbol display area. Such an effect in which the obstructing character B315 assists the non-bonus symbol display area side in winning is also called an obstructing effect 319.

Figure 78 (w) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 78 (v) in the same variable display as Figure 78 (v). Figure 78 (w) shows a scene in which the push-to-reach performance 309 continues to be executed, the obstructing character B315 pushes the partition 310 to the bonus symbol display area side, and the non-bonus symbol display area side wins (the bonus symbol display area side loses). In other words, the non-bonus symbol 312b ("4" symbol) on the non-bonus symbol display area 312 side pushes the bonus symbol 311a (third zero symbol) on the bonus symbol display area 311, and the entire display area becomes the non-bonus symbol display area 312. As a result, the non-bonus symbol "4" displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area becomes the last stop symbol in the push-to-reach performance. In this way, if the non-bonus symbol display area wins (meets a certain condition), the stop symbol will be selected from the non-bonus symbols (performance symbols) displayed in the non-bonus symbol display area.

Figure 78 (x) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 78 (w) in the same variable display as Figure 78 (w). Display screen 7a shows a scene in which a "4" pattern, different from the left and right performance patterns 8 (reach patterns), is displayed as the center performance pattern 8C, and a miss pattern arrangement 291 (confirmed miss pattern arrangement) is displayed, indicating that the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a miss.

Next, using FIG. 79, another execution mode of the push reach performance 309 (specific performance, specific reach performance) will be described. In this execution mode, the display mode of the partition section 310 (moving display section) is changed to indicate the possibility of awarding a bonus (jackpot reliability) in the push reach performance. FIG. 79(a) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since FIG. 76(h) in the same variable display as FIG. 76(h). FIG. 79(a) shows a scene in which the push reach performance 309 is continuously executed, and at the timing when the non-bonus symbol display area side further pushes the partition section 310 into the bonus symbol display area side, the partition section 310 changes its display mode and executes the background color change performance 317. In FIG. 79(A), the partition section 310 changes its display mode by emitting light at a predetermined position on the display screen.

Figure 79(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 79(a) in the same variable display as Figure 79(a). In Figure 79(b), the pushing reach effect 309 continues to be executed, and a scene is shown in which the partition 310 has changed to the first partition color 310a (shown in a grid pattern) in the background color change effect 317 executed in Figure 79(a). Figure 79(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 79(b) in the same variable display as Figure 79(b). In Figure 79(c), the background color change effect 317 in the pushing reach effect 309 continues to be executed, changing the bonus symbol displayed in the bonus symbol display area 311, and showing a scene in which the bonus symbol display area side (bonus symbol side) has pushed the partition 310 into the non-bonus symbol display area side.

In addition, the background color change effect 317 shows a scene in which the partition 310, which has changed its display color to the first partition color 310a, moves and the background color of the bonus symbol display area 311 changes to the first background color 317a corresponding to the first partition color 310a. In addition, in the background color change effect 317, when the partition 310 passes, the display area of the part that it has passed through changes to a color that corresponds to (matches) the changed color of the partition 310. In addition, when the background color change effect 317 is executed, the bonus symbol display area 311 is more likely to win (satisfy a specified condition) than when the background color change effect 317 is not executed. In response to this, the number of push direction suggestion parts 313 is increased.

Figure 79(d) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 79(c) in the same variable display as Figure 79(c). Figure 79(d) shows a scene in which the background color change effect 317 in the pushing reach effect 309 continues to be executed, and the bonus symbol display area 311 further pushes the partition 310 toward the non-bonus symbol display area 312. This expands the display area of the bonus symbol display area 311, which has become the first background color 317a. Figure 79(e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 79(d) in the same variable display as Figure 79(d). Figure 79(e) shows a scene in which the background color change effect 317 in the pushing reach effect 309 continues to be executed, and the bonus symbol display area 311 further pushes the partition 310 toward the non-bonus symbol display area 312.

As a result, the non-bonus symbol display area 312 disappears, and the entire display area becomes the bonus symbol display area 311 with the first background color 317a, showing a scene in which the bonus symbol display area side has won. In other words, the bonus symbol 311a (first zero symbol) on the bonus symbol display area 311 side pushes aside the non-bonus symbol 312b ("4" symbol) on the non-bonus symbol display area 312, showing a scene in which the entire display area becomes the bonus symbol display area. As a result, when the bonus symbol display area side wins, the first zero symbol, which is the bonus symbol displayed in the bonus symbol display area, becomes the final stopping symbol in the push reach performance.

Figure 79(f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 79(e) in the same variable display as Figure 79(e). The display screen 7a shows a scene in which the first zero pattern 282a, which is the same as the left and right performance patterns 8 (reach patterns), is displayed as the center performance pattern 8C, and a winning pattern arrangement 284 (specific stopping mode, first specific stopping mode) indicating a jackpot (win) is displayed.

In addition, in the background color change performance 317 of this embodiment, an execution mode has been described in which the display color of the partition 310 is changed to a first partition color (e.g., red), and the background color of the display screen is changed to a first background color (e.g., red) corresponding to the first partition color in response to the movement of the partition 310. In addition to such a mode, the display color of the partition 310 and the background color of the display screen may each be provided in a plurality of colors. For example, a mode may be provided in which the display color of the partition is changed to a second partition color (e.g., blue), and the background color of the display screen is changed to a second background color (e.g., blue) corresponding to the second partition color in response to the movement of the partition, or the display color of the partition is changed to a third partition color (e.g., gold), and the background color of the display screen is changed to a third background color (e.g., gold) corresponding to the third partition color in response to the movement of the partition.

The possibility that the bonus display area will win, i.e., that a bonus will be awarded, may vary depending on the display color of the divider and the background color of the display screen used in the background color change presentation. For example, the probability of a bonus being awarded (the probability that the bonus display area will win) may increase in the order of the first divider color, the second divider color, and the third divider color. The possibility of a bonus being awarded (the probability that the bonus display area will win) may be set to 100% (guaranteed) depending on the display color of the divider and the background color of the display screen used in the scenery change presentation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the partition 310 is a display image displayed on the display screen, but instead of this, the movable member may be made operable on the display screen and the partition 310 may be composed of a movable member. The display color of the movable member may also be made changeable. As an example of a mode for changing the display color of a partition composed of a movable member (movable part, movable body), a mode in which multiple LEDs (display units) capable of changing the display color are provided on the movable member is exemplified. Then, by controlling the lighting of the LEDs on the movable member in a predetermined display mode (color, flashing, lighting, etc.), it becomes possible to change the display color of the movable member.

In this embodiment, the background color of the display area (background) of the display screen through which the partition (moving display body) passes changes sequentially in response to the partition's movement. Alternatively or in addition to this, the character displayed in the display area of the display screen through which the partition passes may be changed to a different character in response to the partition's movement, or the shape (display mode) of the character displayed in the display area of the display screen through which the partition passes may be changed in response to the partition's movement. Also, although a partition on a display and a partition of a movable member are given as examples of a moving display body, the moving display body may be of any shape (round, square, a specific character type, brush type, letter type, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, the background color of almost the entire display area (background) of the display screen is changed to correspond to the color of the partition in response to the movement of the partition. Alternatively or in addition to this mode, there may be an execution mode in which the movement range of the partition becomes part of the display area on the display screen, and in this execution mode, the background color of part of the display area (background) of the display screen may be changed to correspond to the color of the partition (moving display body) in response to the movement range of the partition. Also, when there are multiple execution modes in which the range in which the background color of the display area (background) of the display screen changes is different, the reliability of a jackpot may be higher when the change range is larger than when the change range is smaller.

In addition, when the background color of the display area (background) of the display screen through which the partition passes changes sequentially in response to the movement of the partition, the moving speed of the partition may change midway through the movement (for example, switching between pausing, moving at high speed, moving at medium speed, moving at low speed, etc.). This diversifies the manner in which the background color of the display area (background) of the display screen changes, increasing interest in the game.

Another example of changing the display mode of a specific display area on the display screen in conjunction with (corresponding to) the movement of a moving display body is a mode in which a brush-shaped moving display body moves on the display screen in a specific movement manner, and the display mode of the part of the display area on the display screen that has moved in correspondence with the movement is changed.

[Special development performance]
Next, the presentation mode of the special development presentation (stop position development presentation, stop order development presentation) which is the game presentation of the pachinko game machine of the embodiment 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. 82. In FIG. 80(a), three first presentation reserves 9a ("◯" patterns) are displayed in the first presentation reserve display area 9c (first presentation reserve display section) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a. This indicates that there are three pieces of unconsumed information (information such as special pattern hit/miss judgment random numbers) that are acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20. In addition, one variable pattern 9f is displayed in the variable pattern display area 9e at the bottom center of the display screen 7a with a "◯" pattern that is slightly larger than the first presentation reserve 9a. In this variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that a variable display is currently being executed is displayed. And, depending on the display mode of this variable pattern 9f, it may be possible that the result of the currently executed variable display will be a big hit (stop display with a big hit pattern).

Figure 80(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 80(a) in the same variation display as Figure 80(a). On the display screen 7a, the high-speed variation of the performance symbols has slowed down and transitioned to a medium-speed variation. Also, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the left pattern array 281L are displayed varying from above to below. In the center of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the middle pattern array 281C are displayed varying from above to below. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the right pattern array 281R are displayed varying from above to below. Also, in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, a background pattern imitating a star is displayed, indicating that the special development performance 325 described later has been executed. Also, the performance at the start of this special development performance 325 (stop position development performance, stop order development performance) is also called the variation start performance 321 (pre-stage performance).

In addition, in the special development effect 325 (stop position development effect, stop order development effect), after the start of the game effect, the first (initial) stopping pattern of the changing performance patterns is displayed stopped at a different stop display position (first area, second area, or third area). On the other hand, the display mode of this change start effect 321 is a common display mode regardless of which stop display position (first area, second area, or third area) it is displayed at, and the player cannot (difficult to) understand (recognize) at which stop display position (first area, second area, or third area) the first (initial) stopping pattern of the changing performance patterns will be displayed stopped at just by looking at the change start effect 321 immediately after the start of the special development effect 325.

Figure 80(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 80(b) in the same variable display as Figure 80(b). Also, Figure 80(c) shows that the special development effect 325 continues to be executed. Figure 80(c) shows a scene in which the first zero pattern 282a is stopped (temporarily stopped) as the left effect pattern 8L in the first area 322 (first stop position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, while the center effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R continue to display the variable. That is, Figure 80(c) shows a pattern (stop order pattern) in which the stop display is performed in a stop mode (stop order, first stop order) in which the left effect pattern 8L is stopped first (first, specific order) out of the three effect patterns.

Figure 80(d) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 80(b) in the same variable display as Figure 80(b). Figure 80(d) also shows that the special development effect 325 continues to be executed. Figure 80(d) shows a scene in which the first zero pattern 282a is stopped (temporarily stopped) as the middle effect pattern 8C in the second area 323 (second stop position) in the center of the display screen 7a, and the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R continue to change. That is, Figure 80(d) shows a pattern (stop order pattern) in which the stop display is performed in a stop mode (stop order, second stop order) in which the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped first (first, specific order) out of the three effect patterns.

Figure 80(e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 80(b) in the same variable display as Figure 80(b). Also, Figure 80(e) shows that the special development effect 325 continues to be executed. Figure 80(e) shows a scene in which the third zero pattern 282c is displayed (temporarily stopped) as the right effect pattern 8R in the third area 324 (third stop position) on the right side of the display screen 7a, while the left effect pattern 8L and the center effect pattern 8C continue to display the variable. That is, Figure 80(e) shows a pattern (stop order pattern) in which the stop display is performed in a stop mode (stop order, third stop order) in which the right effect pattern 8R is displayed first (first, specific order) out of the three effect patterns.

In the special development effect 325 (stop position development effect, stop order development effect) which is the game effect of this embodiment, depending on the stop order of the effect symbols 8 (which effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific order) and on which stop position (stop area) the effect symbol 8 stopped and displayed first (specific order) is stopped and displayed, a game effect of a different display mode is executed (transitions to). Figure 80 (f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed from Figure 80 (c) in the same variable display as Figure 80 (c). Also, Figure 80 (f) shows a scene in which the special development effect 325 of Figure 80 (c) is continuously executed, and the reach possible or impossible effect 326 (first game effect) corresponding to the stop position (stop order) is executed based on the left effect symbol 8L being stopped and displayed first (specific order) in the first area 322 (first stop position). That is, as the special development effect 325, the reach possible or impossible effect 326 is executed corresponding to the stop position (stop order).

Here, the reach possible/possible performance 326 is a performance (teasing performance) that indicates whether a reach performance is executed (whether the stopped pattern becomes a reach pattern), that is, whether the second stopped pattern matches the first stopped pattern (first zero pattern 282a). In this reach possible/possible performance, if the first stopped pattern matches the second stopped pattern and the stopped pattern becomes a reach state, then a predetermined reach performance is executed. For this reach performance that can be executed, multiple reach performances with different jackpot reliability and display modes are prepared. Also, in the reach possible/possible performance, if the first stopped pattern does not match the second stopped pattern does not match, the reach performance is not executed, a combination of miss patterns is displayed, and the variable display ends.

Figure 80(f) shows a scene in which the right effect pattern 8R, which will be the second stopping pattern, is a pushing effect between the first zero pattern 282a, which matches the left effect pattern 8L that was stopped first, and a mismatched "8" pattern, suggesting that one of them will stop and be displayed. The player's interest in the game is heightened in the hope that the first zero pattern 282a will stop and be displayed as the right effect pattern 8R, resulting in a reach effect and a jackpot.

Figure 81 (g) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 80 (f) in the same variable display as Figure 80 (f). Figure 81 (g) also shows a scene in which the special development effect 325 of Figure 80 (f) continues to be executed, and the second stopped right effect symbol 8R becomes the first zero symbol 282a which matches the first stopped left effect symbol 8L, resulting in a reach state and confirming the execution of the reach effect. Here, the third (last) stopped middle effect symbol 8C continues to display a variable display.

Figure 81 (h) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 80 (f) in the same variable display as Figure 80 (f). Also, Figure 81 (g) shows a scene in which, as a result of the reach possible/possible performance 326 (first game performance) in Figure 80 (f), the right performance pattern 8R displayed second becomes a "8" pattern that does not match the left performance pattern 8L displayed first, and the reach performance is not executed and a miss pattern (miss pattern arrangement) is displayed. Note that, in the reach possible/possible performance, a "0" pattern is exemplified as a performance pattern that constitutes a reach mode, but even if the performance pattern is a performance pattern other than the "0" pattern 282 (non-specific patterns such as "1", "2", etc.), it may be a reach mode in the reach possible/possible performance. Of course, the performance pattern that becomes a reach mode in the reach possible/possible performance may be limited to a "0" pattern. Also, the reach mode in this case includes a case in which a "0" pattern of a different display mode is displayed.

Figure 81 (i) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 80 (d) in the same variable display as Figure 80 (d). Figure 81 (i) also shows a scene in which the special development effect 325 of Figure 80 (d) continues to be executed, and based on the medium performance pattern 8C being stopped and displayed first (in a specific order) in the second area 322 (first stop position), a pseudo-variable effect 327 (second game effect) corresponding to that stop position (stop order) is executed. In other words, as the special development effect 325, the pseudo-variable effect 327 is executed in accordance with the stop position (stop order).

The pseudo-variable effect 327 is a game effect in which one or more (all) of the effect symbols are temporarily stopped during a single display of the variable effect symbols, and then changed again, making it appear as if multiple variable effects have been performed. This allows the player to feel as if more variable effects have been performed than would normally be performed, increasing the player's anticipation of a big win. In addition, in the pseudo-variable effect 327 of this embodiment, the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-variable effect is made into an effect symbol (stop symbol) that constitutes a stop display mode (for example, "333") consisting of three effect symbols.

Therefore, when multiple provisional stop displays are executed in the pseudo-variable display, if two of the provisionally displayed display patterns match, a reach state will be reached, and if three match, the display pattern will be a winning pattern arrangement 284 or the transition pattern arrangement 285 described above. This is to grant the player a specific gaming benefit, so such a display pattern is also called a benefit-granting pattern arrangement. Here, "matching" includes cases where the exact same display pattern is displayed (for example, "555" or a zero pattern with the same display mode) and cases where a zero pattern with a different display mode is displayed.

In addition, in this pseudo-variable presentation, the presentation symbols that are temporarily stopped to form the bonus symbol array may be limited to the aforementioned "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol), or the bonus symbol array may be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying presentation symbols other than the "0" symbol 282 (non-specific symbols such as "1", "2", etc.).

Figure 81(i) shows a scene in which the provisionally stopped first zero symbol 282a moves towards the upper left corner of the display screen in pseudo-variable performance 327, which is executed based on the middle performance symbol 8C being the first to be stopped (the performance symbol being the first to be stopped and displayed in the second area). Figure 81(j) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 81(i), in the same variable display as Figure 81(i). Figure 81(j) also shows the pseudo-variable performance 327 (second game performance) of Figure 81(i) continuing to be executed. Figure 81 (j) shows a scene in which the first zero pattern 282a, the first temporary stop pattern that was moved and displayed in Figure 81 (i), is displayed in the secondary pattern display area in the upper left of the display screen ("0↓↓"), while the main pattern display area in the center of the display screen continues the pseudo-changing performance 327, displaying the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R all in a changing state, and the display of the changing performance patterns has begun again.

The sub-pattern display section is located in a relatively small size in the upper left of the display screen compared to the main pattern display section in the center of the display screen. The performance pattern displayed in the sub-pattern display section then becomes the performance pattern displayed in the main pattern display section after the pseudo-variation display. As shown in the sub-pattern display section of Figure 81 (j), the first temporary stop pattern in the pseudo-variation performance 327 is the left performance pattern 8L.

Figure 81 (k) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 81 (j) in the same changing display as Figure 81 (j). Also, Figure 81 (k) shows a scene in which the pseudo-changing performance 327 (second game performance) of Figure 81 (j) continues to be executed, and after another changing display, the second zero pattern 282b as the middle performance pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second area 323. Note that after the performance pattern starts to change, if the middle performance pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second area 323 (second stop position) as the first stopped display pattern, and the pseudo-changing performance 327 (second game performance) is executed, the middle performance pattern 8C will continue to be temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined performance pattern while the pseudo-changing performance 327 is being executed.

Figure 81 (l) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 80 (k) in the same variable display as Figure 81 (k). Figure 81 (l) also shows a scene in which the pseudo-variable performance 327 of Figure 81 (k) continues to be executed, and the temporary stop pattern is moved and displayed in the sub-pattern display section based on the fact that the middle performance pattern 8C in Figure 81 (k) is again temporarily stopped and displayed in the second area 322 (first stop position) in the first place (specific order). The second zero pattern 282b of the temporary stop pattern shown in Figure 81 (l) is the second temporary stop pattern in the pseudo-variable performance 327 (second game performance).

Figure 82 (m) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 81 (l) in the same change display as Figure 81 (l). Figure 82 (m) also shows that the pseudo change performance 327 (second game performance) of Figure 81 (l) is still being executed. Figure 82 (m) shows that the second zero pattern 282a, the second temporary stop pattern that was moved and displayed in Figure 81 (l), is displayed in the sub-pattern display area at the top left of the display screen ("0↓0"), and the pseudo change performance 327 continues in the main pattern display area in the center of the display screen, displaying the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R all in a change, and the display of the performance patterns has begun again (and again).

In the sub-symbol display section, the first temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-fluctuation performance 327 is displayed as a left performance symbol, and the second temporary stop symbol is displayed as a right performance symbol, and these temporary stop symbols form part of the stop display mode of the performance symbols in the sub-symbol display section. Also, as shown in the sub-symbol display section of FIG. 82(m), the second temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-fluctuation performance 327 is the right performance symbol 8L. In this way, depending on which temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-fluctuation performance 327 it is (depending on when the temporary stop symbol is displayed during the pseudo-fluctuation performance), the three performance symbols that form the stop display mode are displayed in different positions (the first time is the left performance symbol, the second time is the right performance symbol, and the third time, which will be described later, is the center performance symbol).

Figure 82(n) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 82(m) in the same variable display as Figure 82(m). Also, Figure 82(n) shows a scene in which the pseudo-variable performance 327 (second game performance) of Figure 82(m) is continuously executed, and after another variable display, the third zero pattern 282c as the middle performance pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second area 323. Also, at this time, the first zero pattern is displayed as the left performance pattern and the second zero pattern is displayed as the right performance pattern in the sub-pattern display section (the middle performance pattern is being displayed variable), and the temporary stop display of the third zero pattern 282c in the pseudo-variable performance 327 shown in Figure 82(n) allows the player to recognize that the stop display mode of the performance patterns displayed in the sub-pattern display section will all be the same performance pattern (transition pattern arrangement 285). This increases the interest in the game. In addition, the third zero symbol 282c of the provisional stopping symbol shown in FIG. 82(n) is the third provisional stopping symbol in the pseudo-variable effect 327 (second game effect).

Figure 82(o) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 82(n) in the same variable display as Figure 82(n). Also, Figure 82(o) shows a scene in which the pseudo-variable performance 327 (second game performance) of Figure 82(n) continues to be executed, and the third zero pattern 282c tentatively displayed in Figure 82(n) is moved to the sub-pattern display section, and then the stopped display mode of the performance pattern displayed in the sub-pattern display section is moved to the center of the display screen and enlarged. Also, the third tentative stop pattern of the pseudo-variable performance shown in Figure 82(n) is the middle performance pattern 8C, out of the three performance patterns that make up the stopped display mode.

Figure 82 (o) shows a stop display mode configured by the temporary stop patterns (temporary stop display patterns) of the pseudo-variable performance 327 (second game performance), with the left performance pattern being the first zero pattern 282a, which is the first temporary stop pattern, the right performance pattern being the second zero pattern 282b, which is the second temporary stop pattern, and the center performance pattern being the third zero pattern 282c, which is the third temporary stop pattern. In addition, the stop display mode is configured by "0" patterns 282 of different display modes, resulting in a transition pattern arrangement 285 (specific stop mode, second specific stop mode).

Figure 82(p) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 82(o) in the same variable display as Figure 82(o). Figure 82(p) shows a scene in which a pattern change performance 288 is being performed in which three "0" patterns 282 with different display modes change to other performance patterns based on the stop display (provisional stop display) of the transition pattern array 285 in Figure 82(o). The execution mode of the pattern change performance 288 is the same as that shown in Figure 65(i) etc., so a detailed explanation is omitted. In this way, when the first performance pattern to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the performance patterns begins is the middle performance pattern (when the first performance pattern to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed in the second area), the pseudo-variable performance (second game performance) described above is executed.

Figure 82 (q) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 80 (e) in the same variable display as Figure 80 (e). Also, Figure 82 (q) shows a scene in which the special development performance 325 of Figure 80 (d) is continuously executed, and the right performance pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the third area 324 (third stop position) first (specific order), and the SP reach performance 328 (third game performance, battle reach performance) corresponding to the stop position (stop order) is executed based on that. That is, as the special development performance 325, the SP reach performance 328 is executed corresponding to the stop position (stop order). Also, this SP reach performance (third game performance) is a game performance with a high jackpot reliability compared to the reach possibility performance (first game performance) and the pseudo-variable performance (second game performance) described above. In addition, the pseudo-variable effect (second game effect) is considered to be a game effect with a higher probability of winning than the reach possible effect (first game effect).

The SP reach effect 328 is called a special reach effect, and is considered to be a game effect with a particularly high reliability of winning among reach effects. When this SP reach effect is executed, the player's expectations for a big win are significantly increased and their interest in the game is heightened. Since the right effect pattern 8R is stopped and displayed first (in a specific order) in the third area 324 (third stop position), the execution of the SP reach effect is confirmed, and in Figure 82 (q) a third zero pattern 282c that matches (is the same as) the right effect pattern 8R that is already stopped and displayed as the left effect pattern 8L is displayed, and a reach mode is created with the third zero pattern 282c as the reach pattern.

Figure 82(r) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 82(q) in the same variable display as Figure 82(q). Also, Figure 82(r) continues to execute the SP reach effect 328 (third game effect) that started in Figure 82(q), with ally characters and enemy characters displayed in the center of the display screen, five stars displayed at the bottom of the display screen to indicate that this is a game effect with a high probability of winning, a small reach effect pattern ("0↓0") with the third zero symbol as the reach symbol displayed at the top right of the display screen, and the words "SP reach" displayed at the top left of the display screen.

As mentioned above, in the special development effects (stop position development effect, stop order development effect) of this embodiment, game effects with different display modes are executed (first game effect, second game effect, third game effect) depending on the stop position and stop order of a predetermined (specific order) performance pattern (specific or non-specific pattern) after the variable display of the performance patterns begins. This draws attention to which identification patterns are provisionally displayed in which order and at which position, increasing interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to increase interest in the game by introducing new game effects.

Next, using Figure 83, we will explain another execution mode of the special development effect mentioned above. In this execution mode, after the variable display of the effect symbols starts, an effect is added that teases which effect symbol will stop and be displayed in a specific order (first). This increases the player's sense of anticipation that the effect symbol he or she desires (left effect symbol, center effect symbol, or right effect symbol) will stop and be displayed.

In FIG. 83(a), the high-speed fluctuating performance symbols are now slowing down and shifting to a medium-speed fluctuating pattern. Also, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the left pattern array 281L are displayed fluctuating from top to bottom. In the center of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the middle pattern array 281C are displayed fluctuating from top to bottom. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols of the right pattern array 281R are displayed fluctuating from top to bottom. Also, in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, a background pattern resembling a star is displayed, indicating that the special development performance 325 described below has been executed. Also, the performance at the start of this special development performance 325 (stop position development performance, stop order development performance) is also called the change start performance 321 (pre-stage performance).

Figure 83(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 83(a) in the same variable display as Figure 83(a). Figure 83(b) shows the first zero symbol 282a displayed semi-transparently (indicated by a dashed line) as a tentatively stopped left performance symbol 8L in the first area 322, the third zero symbol 282c displayed semi-transparently (indicated by a dashed line) as a tentatively stopped middle performance symbol 8C in the second area 323, and the second zero symbol 282b displayed semi-transparently (indicated by a dashed line) as a tentatively stopped right performance symbol 8R in the third area 324. Also, by fluctuating the tentatively stopped performance symbols displayed semi-transparently (indicated by a dashed line), it is shown that the first stopping symbol has not been confirmed.

In addition, by showing (displaying) these "0" symbols 282 semi-transparently (shown by dashed lines), a first stop preview effect 331 (first stop symbol preview effect) is shown, which indicates which symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, or right symbol) will stop and be displayed first (in a specific order). The first stop preview effect 331 is a game effect (preview effect) that shows the player, in a step-by-step manner, which symbol will stop and be displayed first (in a specific order). This increases the player's sense of anticipation that the desired symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, or right symbol) will stop and be displayed first.

Figure 83(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 83(b) in the same changing display as Figure 83(b). Figure 83(c) shows a scene in which the first stop notice performance 331 shown in Figure 83(b) continues to be executed, with the right performance pattern 8R changing from semi-transparent to a displayed state and resuming the changing display, while the left performance pattern 8L and the middle performance pattern 8C remain semi-transparent (shown by dashed lines) and maintain their swaying changing state. This shows that in the first stop notice performance 331, the right performance pattern 8R is excluded from the first target to be stopped and the performance patterns that have the potential to be stopped first are the left performance pattern 8L and the middle performance pattern 8C.

Figure 83(d) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since Figure 83(c) in the same variable display as Figure 83(c). Figure 83(d) shows a scene in which the first stop notice performance 331 shown in Figure 83(c) is still being executed, and in addition to the right performance pattern 8R, the middle performance pattern 8C changes from semi-transparent to a displayed state and resumes the variable display, while the left performance pattern 8L remains semi-transparent (shown by a dashed line) and maintains a state of swaying and variable. This shows that in the first stop notice performance 331, the right performance pattern 8R and the middle performance pattern 8C are excluded from the first targets to be stopped and displayed, and the performance pattern that may be the first to be stopped and displayed is the left performance pattern 8L. Also, at this point, the player can recognize that the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed first is the left performance pattern 8L.

Figure 83(e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 83(d) in the same variable display as Figure 83(d). Figure 83(e) shows a scene in which the first stop notice performance 331 shown in Figure 83(d) is continuously executed, and the left performance pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area 322 (first stop position). As a result, it is determined that the first performance pattern to be stopped and displayed out of the three performance patterns 8 is the left performance pattern 8L. In addition, as the left performance pattern 8L is stopped and displayed first, the aforementioned reach possibility performance 326 (first game performance) is executed after this. The execution mode of the reach possibility performance 326 has been described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in the first stop notice performance 331, if the center performance pattern 8C is determined to be the first performance pattern to be stopped, the pseudo-variable performance 327 (second game performance) described above is executed, and if the right performance pattern 8R is determined to be the first performance pattern to be stopped, the SP reach performance 328 (third game performance) described above is executed.

As explained above, the first stop notice effect creates an expectation of which effect symbol will be displayed first (in a specific order), making it possible to enhance the game effect. In addition, in the above-mentioned execution mode, game effects with different display modes are executed depending on which effect symbol (left effect symbol, center effect symbol, or right effect symbol) is the first effect symbol to be displayed and at which stop position the first effect symbol is displayed. Instead of or in addition to this mode, game effects with different display modes may be executed depending on which effect symbol (left effect symbol, center effect symbol, or right effect symbol) is the second effect symbol to be displayed and at which stop position the second effect symbol is displayed. In addition, game effects with different display modes may be executed depending on which performance symbol is stopped and displayed third (last) (left performance symbol, center performance symbol, or right performance symbol) and on which stopping position the performance symbol is stopped and displayed third (last).

In Example 5, game effects (symbol change effect, blink stock effect, countdown reach effect, push-and-pull reach effect, special development effect, first stop preview effect) different from the preview effects described in Example 1 (conversation preview, step-up preview, etc.) are described. As with Example 1, these game effects in Example 5 can be preview effects that can be determined (executed) in both low load and high added states. This allows for a mode in which only the number of preview effects belonging to the preview effect type is reduced while maintaining (without reducing) the number and types of preview effect types as much as possible.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the notice determination table (game performance determination table) for the high load state is compared with the notice determination table (game performance determination table) for the low load state in such a manner that the number and types of notice performance types (game performance types) to be determined are maintained, while only the number of notice performances belonging to the notice performance type is reduced. Therefore, the above-mentioned game performances can be executed in both low load and high load states, but the number of execution modes differs depending on the state. As a result, the amount of control processing related to the determination of notice performances is reduced when the notice performance determination process is performed using the notice determination table for the high load state, compared to when the notice performance determination process is performed using the notice determination table for the low load state.

Specifically, in a low-load state, all patterns of the game presentation described above may be executable, and in a high-load state, some of the patterns of the game presentation described above may be executable. For example, in a low-load state, all execution modes of the game presentation may be executable. On the other hand, in a high-load state, only some of the display modes of the game presentation may be executable. This reduces the execution frequency of a specified game presentation and makes it possible to display execution modes of game presentations with high reliability, thereby reducing the control burden in a high-load state and preventing a decrease in interest in the game as much as possible. Also, in the execution modes described above, more execution modes may be executable in a low-load state than in a high-load state.

Alternatively, instead of this mode, the game performance of this embodiment may be a preview performance that can be executed in a low-load state and can be determined by a preview determination table for a low-load state, and a preview performance that cannot be executed in a high-load state and cannot be determined by a preview determination table for a high-load state. This makes it possible to change the preview performance to be determined depending on the amount of control processing of the game performance control unit, diversify the execution mode of the preview performance, and optimize the control processing on the game performance control unit.

Also, instead of this mode, the game performance of this embodiment may be a preview performance that can be executed in a high-load state and can be determined by a preview determination table for a high-load state, and a preview performance that cannot be executed in a low-load state and cannot be determined by a preview determination table for a low-load state. Even with this mode, it is possible to change the preview performance to be determined depending on the amount of control processing of the game performance control unit, diversify the execution mode of the preview performance, and optimize the control processing on the game performance control unit.

[Another aspect 1]
In the above-mentioned embodiment 1, the notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the notice determination table for the low load state, and the number and types of notice performance types to be determined are maintained, while only the number of notice performances belonging to the notice performance type is reduced. As a result, the notice determination process using the notice determination table for the high load state reduces the amount of control processing related to the determination of the notice performance, compared with the notice determination process using the notice determination table for the low load state. However, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, in the notice determination table for the high load state, the number of notice performances to be determined may be reduced and the type of the executable notice performance type may be changed, compared with the notice determination table for the low load state.

Specifically, in the low-load state preview decision table shown in FIG. 52, four types of preview performance types can be executed: conversation preview performance, step-up preview performance, cut-in preview performance, and moving part preview performance. On the other hand, in the low-load state preview decision table of another aspect 1 shown in FIG. 60, four types of preview performance types can be executed: conversation preview performance, moving part preview performance, pattern preview performance, and background preview performance. According to this aspect, in the low-load state, a total of 15 types of preview performances belonging to four types of preview performance types are determined, and 0 to a maximum of 4 preview performances can be executed. In addition, in the high-load state, a total of 6 types of preview performances belonging to four types of preview performance types are determined, and 0 to a maximum of 4 preview performances can be executed. Step-up preview performance and cut-in preview performance are preview performance types (preview performances) exclusive to the low-load state, and pattern preview performance and background preview performance are preview performance types (preview performances) exclusive to the high-load state.

As a result, even in a low load state, there is a preview performance that is exclusive to the low load state, and even in a high load state, there is a preview performance that is exclusive to the high load state, so it is possible to diversify the game performance in both states while preventing the control load of the sub-control unit from becoming an issue. Also, in other aspect 1, an example was shown in which some of the preview performance types were different, but all of the executable preview performance types may be changed to different preview performance types. Also, in the preview performance types to be determined in the preview determination table for the high load state, the number of preview performances belonging to at least one preview performance type is reduced, but this is not limited to such an aspect, and the number of preview performances belonging to all preview performance types may be reduced. Also, the number of preview performances belonging to all preview performance types may be fixed at one preview performance.

Here, the pattern preview effect is a preview effect that indicates the possibility of a jackpot (possibility of playing a special game) by displaying a pattern of a specific character, design, or background, etc. displayed on the display screen 7a in a pattern that is different from the normal pattern. For example, the moon character displayed in the background is usually displayed in yellow, but at a specific timing it becomes a polka dot pattern. This notifies the player that there is a specific degree of possibility (e.g., 10%) that the result of the changing display of the performance pattern that is the polka dot pattern will be a jackpot. Also, by displaying the moon character in a tiger pattern, it is notified that the possibility of a jackpot is higher than with polka dots, and that the probability of a jackpot is high (e.g., 50%).

The background preview effect indicates the possibility of a special game being played by displaying a specific character on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing while the special symbols (effect symbols) are being displayed in a changing manner. In this example, when a "rainbow" appears on the display screen 7a, it indicates that the possibility of a special game being played is relatively high (e.g., 33%).

[Another aspect 2]
In the above-mentioned second embodiment, the type of preview performance to be determined in the preview determination table for the high load state is fixed to one type (cut-in preview performance) of the preview performance types (four types) to be determined in the preview determination table for the low load state, thereby reducing the amount of processing involved in the preview performance determination process. However, this is not limited to such an embodiment. In the preview determination table for the high load state in the second embodiment, one of the preview performance types to be determined in the preview determination table for the low load state is used as is (with the same number and type of preview performances to which it belongs). In this other embodiment, instead of this, the content of the preview performance type to be determined in the preview determination table for the high load state is partially changed.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 61(A), the preview determination table for the high load state determines the preview performance by fixing it to a cut-in preview performance type included in the low load state, but as a preview performance belonging to that cut-in preview performance type, it is possible to execute a preview performance different from the preview performance belonging to the cut-in preview performance type to be determined in the preview determination table for the low load state. In addition, the number of preview performances belonging to the cut-in preview performance type is increased. As a result, although the preview performances to be determined are significantly reduced in the high load state compared to the low load state, the number of preview performances belonging to the specific preview performance types that can be determined increases, making it possible to diversify the performance modes of that preview performance type.

Therefore, in another aspect 2, in a high load state, the number of preview performance types to be determined and the number of preview performances are reduced (fixed) compared to a low load state, but the number of preview performances belonging to the preview performance types to be determined is greater in a high load state than in a low load state. This makes it possible to diversify the game performances in a high load state and increase interest in the game.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 61(B) shows a mode in which the preview decision table for the high load state is fixed to the cut-in preview performance type included in the preview decision table for the low load state, and further, the determinable preview performance belonging to that preview performance type (cut-in preview performance type) is also fixed. That is, in this mode, a decision is made in the preview performance decision process as to whether or not to execute a preview performance, and if it is decided that a preview performance should be executed, a specific preview performance (in this example, a cut-in preview performance related to character C) is always executed. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of processing in the preview performance decision process in a high load state as much as possible, and makes it possible to prevent the sub-control unit from exerting excessive control over the game performance.

In the example shown in Figures 61 (C-1) and (C-2), the number of preview performance types to be determined in the preview determination table for the high load state is less than the number of preview performance types to be determined in the preview determination table for the low load state, but the number is multiple preview performance types. Specifically, the cut-in preview performance type and the pattern preview performance type are determined. In other words, it is possible to determine and execute up to two types of preview performance (preview performance). In addition, some of the preview performance types to be determined in the preview determination table for the high load state are different from the preview performance types to be determined in the preview determination table for the low load state, and some are the same rehearsal performance type, but instead, all may be different preview performance types, or all may be the same preview performance type.

[Another aspect 3]
In another embodiment, the high load state and the low load state can be set according to the game state. Specifically, the number of controls (pieces/second) related to the game performance per unit time, which is calculated by dividing the number of controls related to the game performance that needs to be executed during the variable display of the performance pattern by the average variable time, can be set as the first control state, and the number of controls (pieces/second) related to the game performance per unit time can be set as the second control state, which is smaller than the first control state. As an example of this, the second control state can be set as a time-saving state in which the average variable time is short, and the first control state can be set as a non-time-saving state (normal state) in which the average variable time is longer than the time-saving state. Therefore, in the non-time-saving state (normal state) which is the first control state (specific flag OFF state), the number of preview effects (game effects) to be determined by the preview effect determination process (game effect determination process) is made greater than in the second control state, making it possible to execute a variety of game effects, and in the time-saving state which is the second control state (specific flag ON state), the number of preview effects (game effects) to be determined by the preview effect determination process is made less than in the first control state, making it possible to prevent the control load on the sub-control unit from becoming an issue.

[Another aspect 4]
In another aspect, the high load state may be when a game presentation involving input to a presentation button (first presentation button 63a or second presentation button 63b) is executed. The high load state may also be when the display control amount of the board lamp, frame lamp, etc. becomes abnormal by a predetermined amount. The high load state may also be when a game presentation involving operational control of a movable part is executed, or when a game presentation involving operational control of a movable part has a particularly large control processing amount related to the operational control. In either case, a specific flag is set to ON when the high load state is entered.

[Another aspect 5]
In another embodiment, when the low-load state is during a jackpot game, the advance notice performance during the jackpot game is determined based on an advance notice performance determination table or the like different from that during a non-jackpot game. The variable display for which the advance notice performance is determined may be a variable display related to reserved information for which the change start condition has not been satisfied. In other words, during a jackpot game in which the load on the control processing of the sub-control unit is low, the advance notice performance to be executed related to the reserved information is determined using an advance notice determination table for a low-load state that can determine various advance notice performances, so that various game performances can be executed even in the subsequent high-load state.

In addition, during a low-load state (during jackpot play), a predetermined number of preview performance execution patterns capable of executing one or more preview performances can be created and stored, and one of the preview performance execution patterns can be selected and executed each time the display of the performance symbols changes after the jackpot ends. This preview performance execution pattern can be updated each time a low-load state (jackpot play) occurs.

[Another aspect 6]
In addition, two or more configurations of the first embodiment, the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment, etc. may be combined to set a state determined as a high load state, that is, a state in which a specific flag is turned ON. For example, the specific flag may be turned ON during both the ball-entering performance start process and the variable performance start process, and turned OFF at other times. In addition, when the ball-entering performance start process and the variable performance start process are executed in overlapping fashion, the specific flag may be turned ON, which is considered to be a high load state. In addition, the application patterns of the low load state notice determination table and the high load state notice determination table described in the embodiments and other aspects can also be applied to other embodiments or other aspects. All of these combinations are included in the present invention.

[Another aspect 7]
In addition, in this embodiment, the value "M" of the presentation mode counter is set to a different value depending on the type of winning, but this is not limited to the above embodiment. As another embodiment, the presentation mode set depending on the type of winning may be continued until the game state changes. The change in the game state may be, for example, the next big win game being executed, a change from a high probability state to a low probability state, a change from an open extension state to a non-open extension state, or a change from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state. In addition, the reverse of these embodiments is also included.

[Another aspect 8]
Next, another aspect 3 of the embodiment 1 and the reference example described above will be described. In this other aspect 3, the second large prize winning device 36 of the embodiment 1 and the reference example may be provided with a shutter member (also called an "operating member") that allows or prevents the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 inside. That is, the second large prize winning device 36 may be provided with a shutter member, and when the shutter member is in a first state in which it prevents (prevents) the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39, the game ball that entered the second large prize winning opening 35 passes through a non-specific area that is not the specific area 39, and when the shutter member is in a second state in which it allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39, the game ball that entered the second large prize winning opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 instead of the non-specific area. The solenoid that drives the shutter member is connected to the main control board 80. When such a shutter member is provided, during the 1R and 2R when the second large prize opening 35 opens upon the 15R second jackpot, the shutter member is controlled to the first state to block the specific area 39.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 35 during the extremely short opening time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball can be reliably prevented from passing through the specific area 39. In addition, if the second large prize opening 35 is controlled to close when the shutter member is in the second state during the first and second rounds of the 15R second jackpot, and open when the shutter member is in the first state, the game ball can be prevented from passing through the specific area 39 even if the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 35 is set to a length (e.g., 28 seconds) that allows the game ball to enter the specific area 39. In addition, when it is desired to pass the game ball through the specific area 39 during the 15R first jackpot, etc., the shutter member can be controlled to the second state while the second large prize opening 35 is open. In other words, the shutter member can be controlled to the second state during the above-mentioned V effective period (first period). In the first embodiment, even a small win can pass through the specific area, but by setting the shutter member in the first state during a small win game, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the specific area during a small win game. In addition to this configuration, the location of the specific area 39 or a covering portion provided in front of the specific area 39 on the player side may make it difficult for the player to visually determine whether the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39.

[Another aspect 9]
Whether the processing amount of control related to game performance is greater than a predetermined amount can be determined by whether the processing amount of control related to game performance excluding game performance determination processing is greater than a predetermined amount. When the processing amount of control related to game performance excluding game performance determination processing is small, a determination process with a large processing amount is performed as the game performance determination processing, and when the processing amount of control related to game performance excluding game performance determination processing is large, a determination process with a small processing amount is performed as the game performance determination processing. This makes it possible to change the processing amount of the game performance determination processing depending on the processing amount (processing state) of control related to game performance excluding game performance determination processing, and to balance the control load on the game performance control unit. Also, appropriate control related to game performance is performed without placing an excessive load on the game performance control unit, enabling the execution of a variety of game performances.

In the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the term "game performance" refers to a performance using a specified character or a performance using identification information (performance pattern, special pattern, etc.), and examples of such performances include advance notice performance, character performance, and reach performance. The game performance is considered to belong to any of a number of game performance types. A pseudo-variation advance notice performance may also be provided as an advance notice performance. A pseudo-variation advance notice performance is a performance that indicates the possibility that the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment will be a jackpot, and is a performance that makes it look like multiple pseudo-variation displays are being made by performing a change display, a temporary stop display, and a re-change display during one change display. For example, "pseudo 1 (pseudo-variation 1)" is a performance that makes it look like two change displays are being made by performing one temporary stop display and a re-change display after the start of the change display of the performance pattern, and as the number increases to pseudo 2, pseudo 3, and so on, the number of pseudo-variation displays increases, and the reliability of the jackpot also increases.

In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machine configuration may include a variable ball entry port that can be changed between a ball entry state where the gaming ball can enter and a ball entry state where the gaming ball cannot enter, and a special game execution unit that can execute a special game in which the variable ball entry port (big prize entry port) is in a ball entry state when the result of the first hit/miss judgment or the second hit/miss judgment is a hit. The "start port" may be a variable start port that can be changed between a first state and a second state in which the probability of the gaming ball entering is higher than the first state, or the variable start port may be provided separately from the "start port". The gaming machine may also include a gaming state setting unit that sets a first gaming state in which the frequency of the gaming ball entering the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of the gaming ball entering the variable start port is higher than the first gaming state. Here, the "predetermined frequency" includes 0.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the first or second large prize opening is opened once in one round, but the first or second large prize opening may be opened multiple times in one round, or there may be rounds with different numbers of openings.

In the above embodiment, the control process is to consume the second special chart reserved in priority over the first special chart reserved, i.e., the so-called special chart 2 priority control process, but it is not limited to this, and the control process may be to consume the first special chart reserved in priority over the second special chart reserved, i.e., the so-called special chart 1 priority control process. Also, without setting a priority order between the consumption of the first special chart reserved and the consumption of the second special chart reserved, the control process may be to consume the first special chart reserved and the second special chart reserved in order of the oldest stored, i.e., the so-called ball entry order (storage order) consumption control process.

In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine having a specific area 39, but it is not limited to this, and can also be applied to a type of game machine that does not have a specific area 39 in the big prize opening, and in which whether or not a high probability state is granted after the end of a big win game is determined solely by the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment (the type of big win pattern stopped and displayed). Needless to say, "based on a big win in the special pattern hit/miss judgment (the first special pattern or the second special pattern stopped and displayed as a big win pattern)" includes this type of game machine, the pachinko game machine of this embodiment 1, and other types of game machines. It is also applicable to a pachinko machine of a type that does not have a probability setting unit (does not have a high probability state), has a specific area inside, and has a large prize entrance that can be changed between a ball-entering state where a game ball can enter and a ball-entering state where a game ball cannot enter, and the large prize entrance is in a ball-entering state for a predetermined time when the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a small hit, and when the game ball enters the large prize entrance in this ball-entering state and passes through the specific area, a big hit is won and a big hit game is executed, and a predetermined benefit is given. This pachinko machine is called a type 1/2 mixed machine, and when the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through the specific area. Also, as a benefit, it is possible to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of the game ball entering the starting hole. It can also have a first start hole and a second start hole, and generate a high base state that increases the frequency of balls landing in the second start hole. The present invention can be applied to all of these types of gaming machines.

[others]
(Reference Invention 1)
In a conventional gaming machine that has multiple presentation modes and executes different game presentations depending on the presentation mode being executed, the burden of control processing when executing the game presentation increases, and the control processing of the gaming machine is not optimal, and there is room for improvement. This reference invention has been made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that has a variety of game presentations, performs optimal presentation control processing, and increases the interest of the player in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is as follows:
an identification information display unit that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a variable ball entry port that can be changed between a ball entry possible state where the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state where the game ball cannot enter;
A game performance control unit that executes control related to game performance;
a special game execution unit that executes a special game in which the variable ball entrance is in a ball entrance state when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
As game states, there are a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game performance control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game performance control unit is greater than that of the first control state,
The game performance control unit has a preview performance storage unit that stores a plurality of preview performances having different execution modes, a preview performance determination unit that determines a preview performance to be executed from the preview performances stored in the preview performance storage unit, and a preview performance execution unit that executes the preview performance determined by the preview performance determination unit,
the advance notice performance execution unit executes an advance notice performance in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the varying display of the identification information, thereby indicating the possibility of execution of the special game;
The preview performance determination unit determines a preview performance to be determined in the first control state, and the preview performance determination unit does not determine a preview performance to be determined in the second control state.

With this type of gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game performance control unit is low, it is possible to determine a preview performance that is not subject to determination in the second control state where the control processing amount is high. This makes it possible to change the preview performance that is subject to determination by the preview performance determination unit depending on the control processing amount of the game performance control unit, thereby optimizing the control processing related to the game performance control unit. In addition, since a preview performance that can only be determined in the first control state is provided, it is possible to increase interest in gaming in the first control state, and it is possible to diversify the game performances overall and increase interest in gaming.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
The preview performance to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the first control state and the preview performance to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the second control state are characterized in that they are at least partially different from each other.

In this type of gaming machine, the preview performance executed in the first control state is different from the preview performance executed in the second control state, i.e., the preview performance is not executed in either the first control state or the second control state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in playing in the first control state and the second control state, and also diversifies the game performances overall, making it possible to increase the interest in playing.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or Reference Invention 1-2,
The number of preview performances that can be executed in the first control state is greater than the number of preview performances that can be executed in the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state in which the control processing amount of the game performance control unit is small, it is possible to determine a preview performance that is not the target of determination in the second control state in which the control processing amount is large, and it is possible to set a larger number of preview performances as the target of determination by the preview performance determination unit than in the second control state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the preview performances and increase the interest in the game by changing the preview performances and the number of preview performances that are the target of determination by the preview performance determination unit depending on the control processing amount (control burden) of the game performance control unit. It is also possible to prevent the control load on the game performance control unit from becoming excessive. Also, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the performance control processing executed by the game performance control unit is large, it is possible to prevent excessive load on the game performance control unit as much as possible by reducing the number of preview performances that the preview performance determination unit targets for determination compared to the first control state in which the processing amount is small.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
Equipped with a starting hole through which the game ball can enter,
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the ball entering the starting hole,
The control process controlled by the game performance control unit includes a ball-entry notice control process executed when the ball enters the starting hole, and a variation start notice control process executed when the display of the variation of the identification information starts,
The second control state is a predetermined time when the ball-entering notice control process is being executed,
The first control state is characterized in that it is a predetermined period of time when the ball-scoring preview performance control process is not being executed.

With this type of gaming machine, the second control state is a predetermined time when the ball-entering preview performance control process, which is executed when the ball enters the starting hole, is being executed, and the first control state is a predetermined time when the ball-entering preview performance control process is not being executed. If the preview performance determination process is executed when the ball-entering preview performance control process is not being executed, it becomes possible to determine the preview performance that is not determined when the preview performance determination process is executed during the ball-entering preview performance control process. This makes it possible to change the preview performance that can be determined depending on the control state (control burden), increase interest in the game, and optimize the control process (game performance control process) of the game performance control unit.

The ball-scoring preview effect executed by the ball-scoring preview effect control process is a preview effect that is executed on the condition that the ball is scored into the starting hole, and is not conditioned on the start of the display of the changing identification information based on the ball scoring. Therefore, the ball-scoring preview effect may start before the display of the changing identification information based on the ball scoring starts, and such a preview effect is called a look-ahead preview effect (look-ahead preview) or advance preview effect (advance preview). Furthermore, the change start preview effect executed by the change start preview effect control process is a preview effect that is executed on the condition that the display of the changing identification information based on the ball score starts. Therefore, the change start preview effect is a preview effect that is executed while the display of the changing identification information based on the ball score is being executed.

In addition, when the number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit in the second control state is reduced compared to the first control state, the number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit can be changed depending on whether the ball-entering preview effect control process is being executed, i.e., the amount of processing of the game performance control process, making it possible to prevent the control load on the game performance control unit from becoming excessive. Also, when the ball-entering preview effect control process is not being executed and the amount of processing of the game performance control process is low, the preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit can be increased, making it possible to diversify the preview effects (game performances) without placing an excessive load on the game performance control unit and increase interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
Equipped with a starting hole through which the game ball can enter,
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the ball entering the starting hole,
The control process controlled by the game performance control unit includes a ball entry performance control process executed when the ball enters the starting hole, and a variation start notice performance control process executed when the variation display of the identification information starts,
The second control state is a predetermined time when the fluctuation start notice performance control process is being executed,
The first control state is characterized in that it is a predetermined period of time when the fluctuation start advance notice control process is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is a predetermined time when the preview performance control process at the start of the change in the identification information is being executed, and the first control state is a predetermined time when the preview performance control process at the start of the change is not being executed. If the preview performance determination process is executed when the preview performance control process at the start of the change is not being executed, it becomes possible to determine the preview performance that is not determined when the preview performance determination process is executed during the execution of the preview performance control process at the start of the change. This makes it possible to change the preview performance that can be determined depending on the control state (the control burden on the gaming performance control unit), increase interest in the game, and optimize the performance control process.

In addition, when the number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit in the second control state is reduced compared to the first control state, the number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit can be changed depending on whether or not the preview effect control process at the start of fluctuation is being executed, i.e., depending on the amount of processing of the performance control process of the game performance control unit, thereby making it possible to prevent the control load on the game performance control unit from becoming excessive. Also, when the preview effect control process at the start of fluctuation is not being executed and the amount of processing of the performance control process is low, the preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit can be increased, thereby diversifying the preview effects without placing an excessive load on the game performance control unit and increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
The first control state is a predetermined time when the special game is being executed,
The second control state is a predetermined period when the special game is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first control state in which the processing amount of the performance control processing of the game performance control unit is small is set to a predetermined time when a special game is being played, and the second control state in which the processing amount of the performance control processing of the game performance control unit is large is set to a predetermined time when a special game is not being played (for example, a predetermined time during the variable display of identification information, or a predetermined time during control processing related to the variable display of identification information, etc.). This makes it possible to execute preview performances that are different from those when a special game is not being played during the execution of a special game, making it possible to increase interest in the game during the special game. For example, it is possible to diversify the preview performances by making the preview performances that can be executed during a special game different from the preview performances that can be executed during the variable display of identification information.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
A variable display time setting unit is provided that can set a first time state in which a predetermined time is set as the variable display time of the identification information, and a second time state in which a variable display time shorter than the first time state can be set as the variable display time of the identification information,
The first control state is a predetermined time in the first time state,
The second control state is a predetermined time in the second time state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is a predetermined time in the second time state in which a short variable display time is possible, and the first control state is a predetermined time in the first time state in which a long variable display time is possible. When the preview performance determination process is performed in the first time state in which a long variable display time is likely to be selected, it becomes possible to determine a preview performance that is not determined when the preview performance determination process is performed in the second time state in which a short variable display time is likely to be selected. This makes it possible to change the preview performance that can be determined depending on the control state (the control burden on the game performance control unit), increase interest in the game, and optimize the performance control process.

The second control state may be the first time state, and the first control state may be the second time state. This makes it possible to change the preview performance (game performance) to be determined by the preview performance determination unit depending on the amount of control processing by the game performance control unit, thereby optimizing the control processing by the game performance control unit.

The device may also be provided with a probability setting unit that can set the probability that the result of the variable display of the identification information will be a specific result to a predetermined probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) higher than the predetermined probability, and the second control state may be the high probability and the first control state may be the predetermined probability. The device may also be provided with a first control state that is the high probability and the second control state that is the predetermined probability. This makes it possible to change the preview performance (game performance) that is to be determined by the preview performance determination unit depending on the amount of control processing by the game performance control unit, thereby optimizing the control processing by the game performance control unit.

The game machine also includes a ball entry port (variable start port) that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the probability of a game ball entering the game port is higher than the first mode, and a ball entry frequency setting unit that can set a first frequency state (low frequency state, low base state) and a second frequency state (high frequency state, high base state) in which the frequency of a ball entering the ball entry port (variable start port) is higher than the first frequency state, and the second control state may be the second frequency state and the first control state may be the first frequency state. Also, the first control state may be the first frequency state and the first control state may be the second frequency state. This also makes it possible to change the preview performance (game performance) to be determined by the preview performance determination unit depending on the control processing amount of the game performance control unit, thereby optimizing the control processing of the game performance control unit.

In addition, some or all of these may be combined. Specifically, the second control state may be the second time state, high probability, and second frequency state, and the first control state may be the first time state, a predetermined probability, and the first frequency state. In addition, the first control state may be the second time state, high probability, and second frequency state, and the second control state may be the first time state, a predetermined probability, and the first frequency state. In addition, the second control state may be the second time state and the second frequency state, and the first control state may be the first time state and the first frequency state. In addition, the first control state may be the second time state and the second frequency state, and the second control state may be the first time state and the first frequency state. In addition, the second control state may be the high probability and the first frequency state, and the first control state may be the predetermined probability and the first frequency state. In addition, the first control state may be the high probability and the second frequency state, and the second control state may be the predetermined probability and the first frequency state. These also make it possible to optimize the control processing of the game performance control unit by varying the preview performance (game performance) that the preview performance determination unit determines, depending on the amount of control processing by the game performance control unit.

(Reference Invention 2)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is as follows:
an identification information display unit that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A game performance control unit that performs a predetermined performance control process;
a special game execution unit that executes a special game advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a specific display mode,
The game performance control unit has a preview performance determination unit that determines a preview performance to be executed, and a preview performance execution unit that executes the preview performance determined by the preview performance determination unit,
The preview performance execution unit is capable of executing a preview performance in association with the variable display of the identification information,
At least, there is a first control state in which the processing amount of the performance control process is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the processing amount of the performance control process is greater than the predetermined amount,
The number of preview performances to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the second control state is characterized in that it is smaller than the number of preview performances to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the first control state.

With this type of gaming machine, in the second control state in which the game performance control unit executes a large amount of processing for the performance control process, it is possible to reduce the number of preview performances to be determined by the preview performance determination unit of the game performance control unit, compared to the first control state in which the performance control process executes a smaller amount of processing than the second control state.

This makes it possible to change the number of preview effects that the preview effect determination unit determines depending on the processing volume of the effect control process, and to prevent the control load on the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Also, when the processing volume of the effect control process is low, the preview effect determination unit determines more preview effects, thereby diversifying the preview effects without placing an excessive load on the game effect control unit and increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
The number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit in the first control state is set to a first predetermined number,
The number of preview performances to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the second control state is characterized in that it is set to a second predetermined number which is smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit in the first control state can be set to a first predetermined number, and the number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit in the second control state can be set to a second predetermined number that is smaller than the first predetermined number. This makes it possible to reduce the number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit in the second control state, in which the processing volume of the performance control process is high, and to increase the number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit in the first control state, in which the processing volume of the performance control process is low, thereby making it possible to diversify the game effects without placing an excessive load on the game effect control unit and increase interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2,
The number of preview performances that can be determined by the preview performance determination unit is the same in the first control state and in the second control state.

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to make the number of game effects that the preview effect determination unit can determine, i.e., the number of executable game effects, the same in both the first and second control states. As a result, even if the number of game effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit is reduced when the processing volume of the effect control process is high (second control state), the number of preview effects that can be determined is not reduced, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3,
The maximum number of preview performances that can be determined by the preview performance determination unit is the same in the first control state and in the second control state.

With such a gaming machine, it is possible to make the maximum number of preview effects that the preview effect determination unit can determine, i.e., the maximum number of executable game effects, the same in both the first and second control states. As a result, even if the number of preview effects to be determined by the preview effect determination unit is reduced when the processing volume of the effect control process is high (second control state), the maximum number of determinable game effects is not reduced, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-4,
The game performance control section is characterized in that the advance notice performance determination section performs advance notice performance determination processing based on the start of the variable display of the identification information.

With such a gaming machine, it becomes possible for the preview performance determination unit to execute the preview performance determination process based at least on the start of the display of changes in the identification information. This makes it possible for the preview performance to be determined by the preview performance determination unit to change depending on the amount of processing in the performance control process when the display of changes in the identification information starts. Here, "executing based on the start of the display of changes in the identification information" means executing based on the start of the display of changes in the identification information, and may be performed before the start of the display of changes in the identification information, after the start, or simultaneously with the start.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-5,
Equipped with a starting hole through which the game ball can enter,
The performance control process includes a ball entry performance control process that is executed based on the ball entering the starting hole,
The state in which the ball-scoring performance control process is being executed is defined as the second control state, and the state in which the ball-scoring performance control process is not being executed is defined as the first control state.

With this type of gaming machine, the state in which the ball-entering performance control process is being executed based on the ball entering the starting hole is the second control state, and the state in which the ball-entering performance control process is not being executed is the first control state. When the preview performance determination process is executed while the ball-entering performance control process is being executed, it is possible to reduce the number of preview performances that the preview performance determination unit determines, and when the preview performance determination process is executed when the ball-entering performance control process is not being executed, it is possible to increase the number of preview performances that the preview performance determination unit determines.

This makes it possible to change the number of preview effects that the preview effect determination unit determines depending on whether the ball-scoring effect control process is in progress, i.e., depending on the amount of processing in the effect control process, and to prevent the control load on the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Also, when the ball-scoring effect control process is not in progress and the amount of processing in the effect control process is low, the preview effect determination unit determines more preview effects, thereby diversifying the preview effects without placing an excessive load on the game effect control unit and increasing interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 3)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is as follows:
an identification information display unit that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A game performance control unit that performs a predetermined performance control process;
a special game execution unit that executes a special game advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a specific display mode,
The game performance control unit has a preview performance determination unit that determines a preview performance to be executed, and a preview performance execution unit that executes the preview performance determined by the preview performance determination unit,
The preview performance is composed of a plurality of preview performance types having different performance modes, and each of the preview performance types is composed of one or more preview performances,
The preview performance execution unit is capable of executing a preview performance in association with the variable display of the identification information,
At least, there is a first control state in which the processing amount of the performance control process is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the processing amount of the performance control process is greater than the predetermined amount,
The number of preview performance types that are to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the second control state is characterized in that it is smaller than the number of preview performance types that are to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the first control state.

With this type of gaming machine, in the second control state in which the game performance control unit executes a large amount of processing for the performance control process, it is possible to reduce the number of preview performance types to be determined by the preview performance determination unit of the game performance control unit, compared to the first control state in which the performance control process executes a smaller amount of processing than the second control state.

This makes it possible to change the number of preview performance types that the preview performance determination unit determines depending on the processing volume of the performance control process, and to prevent the control load on the game performance control unit from becoming excessive. Also, when the processing volume of the performance control process is low, the preview performance determination unit determines more preview performance types, thereby diversifying the preview performances without placing an excessive load on the game performance control unit, and making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1,
The number of the preview performance types to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the first control state is set to a first predetermined number,
The invention is characterized in that the number of preview performance types that the preview performance determination unit determines in the second control state is a second predetermined number that is smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of preview performance types to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the first control state can be set to a first predetermined number, and the number of preview performance types to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the second control state can be set to a second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number. This makes it possible to reduce the number of preview performance types to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the second control state where the processing volume of the performance control process is high, and to increase the number of preview performance types to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the first control state where the processing volume of the performance control process is low, thereby making it possible to diversify the preview performances and increase interest in the game without placing an excessive load on the game performance control unit. Here, the "first predetermined number" is 2 or more, and the "second predetermined number" is 1 or more.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2,
When the game performance is determined by the preview performance determination unit in the second control state, a predetermined specific preview performance type is determined;
The preview performance execution unit is characterized by executing a preview performance belonging to the specific preview performance type.

According to such a gaming machine, when in the second control state where the processing volume of the performance control process is high, the preview performance type that the preview performance determination unit can determine can be a specific preview performance type. This makes it possible to execute multiple preview performances with different preview performance types when in the first control state where the processing volume of the performance control process is low, and to execute a preview performance belonging to a specific preview performance type when in the second control state. Also, when the processing volume of the performance control process is high, it becomes possible to fix the preview performance type to be determined by the preview performance determination unit, thereby preventing the control load on the gaming performance control unit from becoming excessive.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3,
The number of preview performances belonging to the preview performance type that are to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the second control state is characterized in that it is smaller than the number of preview performances belonging to the preview performance type that are to be determined by the preview performance determination unit in the first control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state where the processing volume of the performance control process is high, the preview performance determination unit can reduce the number of preview performance types that can be determined, and can also reduce the number of preview performances belonging to the preview performance types that can be determined. Also, in the first control state where the processing volume of the performance control process is low, the preview performance to be executed can be determined from multiple preview performance types and multiple preview performances belonging to those preview performance types, while in the second control state, even if there are fewer preview performance types than in the first control state, the number of preview performances belonging to the preview performance types is reduced from the first control state to determine the preview performance to be executed.

As a result, when the processing volume of the performance control process is high, it is possible to prevent the control load on the game performance control unit from becoming excessive by reducing both the preview performance type to be determined by the preview performance determination unit and the preview performances belonging to that preview performance type. Here, it is sufficient that the preview performance type to be determined in the second control state has at least one preview performance type to which the number of preview performances belonging to it has been reduced.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4,
When the preview performance determination unit determines to execute a predetermined preview performance type in the first control state, a predetermined preview performance is determined from a plurality of preview performances belonging to the preview performance type;
When the preview performance determination unit determines to execute a specified preview performance type during the second control state, a specific preview performance that has been determined in advance is determined.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing volume of the performance control process is high, the preview performance determination unit can reduce the number of preview performance types that can be determined, and can fix the preview performances that belong to the preview performance types that can be determined. As a result, when the processing volume of the performance control process is high, if the preview performance determination unit determines a preview performance type, the preview performance to be executed is determined accordingly, and it is possible to prevent the control load on the gaming performance control unit from becoming excessive.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-5,
The game performance control section is characterized in that the advance notice performance determination section performs advance notice performance determination processing based on the start of the variable display of the identification information.

With such a gaming machine, it becomes possible for the preview performance determination unit to execute the preview performance determination process based at least on the start of the display of changes in the identification information. This makes it possible for the preview performance to be determined by the preview performance determination unit to change depending on the amount of processing in the performance control process when the display of changes in the identification information starts. Here, "executing based on the start of the display of changes in the identification information" means executing based on the start of the display of changes in the identification information, and may be performed before the start of the display of changes in the identification information, after the start, or simultaneously with the start.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-6,
Equipped with a starting hole through which the game ball can enter,
The performance control process includes a ball entry performance control process that is executed based on the ball entering the starting hole,
The state in which the ball-scoring performance control process is being executed is defined as the second control state, and the state in which the ball-scoring performance control process is not being executed is defined as the first control state.

With this type of gaming machine, a state in which the ball-entering performance control process is being executed based on the ball entering the starting hole is defined as a second control state, and a state in which the ball-entering performance control process is not being executed is defined as a first control state. When the advance notice performance determination process is executed while the ball-entering performance control process is being executed, it is possible to reduce the number of advance notice performances that the advance notice performance determination unit determines, and when the advance notice performance determination process is executed when the ball-entering performance control process is not being executed, it is possible to increase the number of advance notice performances that the advance notice performance determination unit determines.

This makes it possible to change the number of preview effects that the preview effect determination unit determines depending on whether the ball-scoring effect control process is in progress, i.e., depending on the amount of processing in the effect control process, and to prevent the control load on the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Also, when the ball-scoring effect control process is not in progress and the amount of processing in the effect control process is low, the preview effect determination unit determines more preview effects, thereby diversifying the preview effects without placing an excessive load on the game effect control unit and increasing interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 4)
In addition, the gaming machine of the reference invention 4-1 invention is as follows:
A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbol arrangements each composed of a plurality of symbols, and for stopping and displaying symbols selected from the plurality of symbol arrangements in a predetermined stopping manner;
and a bonus awarding means for awarding a predetermined bonus when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific stopping mode.
The pattern arrangement includes a plurality of specific patterns, each of which indicates common information and has a different display mode (zero pattern).
As the specific stop mode,
A first specific stop mode in which a stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols, and the specific symbols constituting the stop mode are composed of the specific symbols of the same display mode;
A second specific stop mode in which a stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols, and at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode is composed of the specific symbols in a display mode different from the display mode of the other specific symbols,
The present invention is characterized in that different benefits (SP reach, big win) are awarded when the first specific stop mode is stopped and when the second specific stop mode is stopped.

According to such a gaming machine, a stop mode is formed by a plurality of symbols, and a plurality of symbol arrays are displayed variably in accordance with the number of symbols that form the stop mode. A plurality of specific symbols are included in one symbol array, and the plurality of specific symbols display common information, although at least a part of the display mode is different from each other. A predetermined bonus is awarded when the stop mode of the symbols becomes a specific stop mode, and the first specific stop mode is composed of specific symbols with the same display mode as the symbols that form the stop mode, and the second specific stop mode is composed of specific symbols with a display mode different from the others, in which case different bonuses are awarded when the stop mode of the symbols becomes the first specific stop mode and when the second specific stop mode. As a result, when a plurality of specific symbols that exist in each symbol array become a specific stop mode, a bonus is awarded even when the display modes are different, so that the player feels that the possibility of bonus awarding has increased, and increases the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
A game performance execution means is provided for executing a predetermined game performance,
As the game presentation,
A first stop effect indicating whether the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the first specific stop mode;
A second stop effect indicating whether the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the second specific stop mode;
A continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode;
The present invention is characterized in that it has the following features.

According to such a gaming machine, the game effects include a first stop effect indicating whether a stop mode that can constitute a first specific stop mode will occur, a first stop effect indicating whether a stop mode that can constitute a second specific stop mode will occur, and a consecutive stop effect that executes the first stop effect and the second stop effect in a predetermined order while maintaining at least one specific symbol. As a result, when the consecutive stop effect is executed, even if the stop mode that can constitute the first specific stop mode (or the second specific stop mode) that can grant a bonus is not reached, a performance is executed to determine whether a stop mode that can constitute a second specific stop mode (or the first specific stop mode) that can grant a bonus will occur, so that it is possible to maintain the expectation of a bonus for a long period of time.

The "stop mode that can constitute the first specific stop mode" includes the first specific stop mode itself ("000") and a component of the previous stage before the first specific stop mode is completed ("0↓0"). For example, an example of the "first stop effect that indicates whether the first specific stop mode itself will occur" is an effect (teasing effect) that indicates whether the middle pattern will stop with a "0" pattern in the same display mode as the left and right "0" patterns in the "0↓0" reach mode (the left and right "0" patterns have the same display mode and the middle pattern is changing). Also, an example of the "first stop effect that indicates whether the first specific stop mode will become a component of the previous stage before it is completed" is an effect (teasing effect) that indicates whether the right pattern will stop with a "0" pattern in the same display mode as the left pattern in the "0↓↓" mode (the left is a "0" pattern and the middle right pattern is changing).

Similarly, the "stop mode that can constitute the second specific stop mode" includes the second specific stop mode itself ("000" (at least one of the "0" symbols has a different display mode from the others)) and a component of the previous stage before the second specific stop mode is completed ("0↓0" (the display modes of the left and right "0" symbols may be the same or different)). For example, as a "second stop effect that indicates whether the second specific stop mode itself will be reached", an effect (teasing effect) indicating whether the middle symbol will stop with a "0" symbol in a display mode different from the left and right "0" symbols in a "0↓0" reach mode (the left and right "0" symbols have the same display mode and the middle symbol is changing) can be exemplified. Also, as a "second stop effect that indicates whether the second specific stop mode will be a component of the previous stage before the second specific stop mode is completed", an effect (teasing effect) indicating whether the right symbol will stop with a "0" symbol in a display mode different from the left symbol in a "0↓↓" mode (the left is a "0" symbol and the middle right symbol is changing) can be exemplified.

In addition, "continuous stop performances in which the first stop performance and the second stop performance are executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols that constitute the stop mode" includes a performance in which the aforementioned "first stop performance indicating whether the first specific stop mode itself will be achieved" and the "second stop performance indicating whether the second specific stop mode itself will be achieved" are executed in a predetermined order, and a performance in which the "first stop performance indicating whether the first specific stop mode will be a component of the previous stage before it is completed" and the "second stop performance indicating whether the second specific stop mode will be a component of the previous stage before it is completed" are executed in a predetermined order.

For example, an example of an "effect in which a first stop effect indicating whether a first specific stop mode will occur" and a "second stop effect indicating whether a second specific stop mode will occur" are executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols that constitute the stop mode" is a effect in which, in a "0↓0" reach mode (where the left and right "0" symbols have the same display mode and the middle symbol is changing), a performance (teasing performance) is executed indicating whether the middle symbol will stop as a "0" symbol in the same display mode as the left and right "0" symbols, and as a result, a "0" symbol in the same display mode as the left and right "0" symbols is not displayed as the middle symbol, and then, while maintaining the "0↓0" reach mode (where the left and right "0" symbols have the same display mode), a performance (teasing performance) is executed indicating whether the middle symbol will stop as a "0" symbol in a different display mode from the left and right "0" symbols. Although the example shows a continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect is executed first and the second stop effect is executed first, the second stop effect may be executed first, or the first stop effect and/or the second stop effect may be executed multiple times in the continuous stop effect. Also, as a result of the reach pattern of "0↓0" in the latter stop effect, there may be cases where the first specific stop pattern (or the second specific stop pattern) is executed, and cases where this is not the case (for example, "020").

As an example of "a performance in which a 'first stop performance indicating whether or not a first specific stop performance is a component of the previous stage before the completion of a first specific stop performance' and a 'second stop performance indicating whether or not a second specific stop performance is a component of the previous stage before the completion of a second specific stop performance' are executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols that constitute the stop mode," an example can be given of a performance (teasing performance) indicating whether or not the right pattern will stop displaying as a '0' pattern in the same display mode as the left pattern in a '0↓↓' mode (where the left is a '0' pattern and the middle right pattern is changing), whereby a '0' pattern in the same display mode as the left pattern is not displayed as the right pattern, and then, while maintaining the '0↓↓' mode (where the left is a '0' pattern and the middle right pattern is changing), a performance (teasing performance) is executed indicating whether or not the right pattern will stop displaying as a '0' pattern in a different display mode from the left pattern. Although the example shows a continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect is executed first and then the second stop effect, the second stop effect may be executed first and then the first stop effect, or the first stop effect and/or the second stop effect may be executed multiple times in the continuous stop effect. Also, as a result of the display mode of "0↓↓" in the latter stop effect, it may or may not be a component of the stage before the first specific stop mode is completed (or a component of the stage before the second specific stop mode is completed) (for example, "0↓2").

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
The successive stop performance is characterized in that the first stop performance or the second stop performance, whichever is executed first, does not result in a specific stop pattern, and the next stop performance is executed.

With such a gaming machine, the consecutive stop effect does not result in a specific stop pattern (first specific stop pattern or second specific stop pattern) in the stop effect (first stop effect or second stop effect) that is executed first out of the first and second stop effects that are executed in sequence, and the next stop effect (second stop effect or first stop effect) is executed. As a result, when the consecutive stop effect is executed, there are multiple opportunities for the specific stop pattern to be achieved, which allows the player to maintain a sense of anticipation of receiving a special bonus for a long period of time.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 or Reference Invention 4-3,
A winning/losing determination means for determining winning/losing based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The game presentation includes a first game presentation and a second game presentation that suggests a higher possibility that the result of the hit/miss determination will be a hit than the first game presentation,
A second specific symbol not included in the symbol array is provided,
At a predetermined timing after the start of the varying display of the patterns, the specific pattern is changed to the second specific pattern, thereby executing the second game presentation.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming presentation includes a first gaming presentation and a second gaming presentation that suggests a higher probability of winning than the first gaming presentation. Then, at a predetermined timing during the variable display, a specific symbol included in the symbol array changes to a second specific symbol that was not included in the symbol array, and the second gaming presentation is executed. This increases the probability of winning when the specific symbol changes to the second specific symbol, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game. Also, since the symbol array includes multiple specific symbols that can change to the second specific symbol, this increases the sense of anticipation for the second gaming presentation being executed, and increases interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4,
When the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol to execute the second game presentation, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss, the second specific symbol is returned to the specific symbol and the display is stopped in a miss stopping mode including the specific symbol.

According to such a gaming machine, when the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol to execute the second game performance, and the win/loss determination result is a miss, after the second game performance is executed, the second specific symbol is changed back to the specific symbol and displayed as a missing stop mode including the specific symbol. This allows the player to reliably recognize which specific symbol became the second specific symbol to execute the second game performance. This also allows the player to recognize again that the specific symbol is the trigger for the execution of the second game performance, and heightens the anticipation for the specific symbol.

(Reference Invention 5)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is as follows:
An identification symbol display means for variably displaying an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A game performance execution means for executing a predetermined game performance;
and a special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result.
As the game performance, there is a reach performance in which one of the plurality of identification symbols is displayed in a variable manner and the other identification symbols are displayed in a reach pattern corresponding to each other,
The reach performance includes a special reach performance in which the reach symbol is changed during the execution of the reach performance to perform a plurality of reach performances,
When the plurality of identification symbols are stopped and displayed as corresponding identification symbols as a result of executing the special reach performance, the specific result is reached and the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the game presentation includes a reach presentation in which one of a plurality of identification symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining identification symbols are displayed as corresponding reach symbols. The reach presentation also includes a special reach presentation in which the reach symbols constituting the reach presentation are changed a predetermined number of times during the execution of the reach presentation, and multiple reach presentations are performed. Then, when the special reach presentation is executed, a special game is executed when all of the plurality of identification symbols are displayed as corresponding identification symbols. As a result, when the special reach presentation is executed, multiple reach presentations are executed while changing the reach symbols, making it possible to increase the player's anticipation of the special game when the special reach presentation is executed.

The machine may also be provided with a variable ball entry port that can be changed between a ball entry state where the game ball can enter and a ball entry blocked state where the game ball cannot enter, and a special game execution means that executes a special game in which the variable ball entry port is in a ball entry blocked state when the result of the variable display of the identification pattern becomes a specific result. The reach effect may also be an effect in which two of the three identification patterns are displayed as a reach pattern that matches, and the remaining one is displayed variably.

Note that "mutually corresponding identification patterns" refers to multiple identification patterns that are a combination of predetermined identification patterns, including cases where multiple identification patterns are a combination of the same identification pattern (e.g., "333" or "777"), and cases where multiple identification patterns are a combination of different predetermined identification patterns (e.g., "135", "268", "337", etc.).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
The identification pattern has a specific pattern,
In the special reach performance, when the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol,
When one of the identification symbols displayed in a variable manner stops and displays as the specific symbol, the reach symbol is changed and displayed in a variable manner again,
When one identification pattern displayed in a variable manner stops and is displayed as an identification pattern corresponding to the reach pattern, the plurality of identification patterns become identification patterns corresponding to each other, resulting in the specified result, and the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific symbol is used as the identification symbol. In the special reach performance, when an identification symbol other than the specific symbol becomes a reach symbol and a reach performance is performed, if one of the identification symbols being displayed in a variable manner stops as a specific symbol, the reach symbol is changed and displayed in a variable manner again. In the special reach performance, when an identification symbol other than the specific symbol becomes a reach symbol and a reach performance is performed, if one of the identification symbols being displayed in a variable manner stops as a symbol that corresponds to the reach symbol, a special game is executed. This allows the player to have a high sense of anticipation for the special game, whether the specific symbol stops or the reach symbol stops as a symbol that corresponds to the reach symbol in the special reach performance.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
The identification pattern has a specific pattern,
The special reach performance starts with an identification pattern other than the specific pattern as the reach pattern,
When the special reach performance is executed and the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol,
When one of the identification symbols displayed in a variable manner stops and displays as the specific symbol, the reach symbol is changed and displayed in a variable manner again,
When the reach pattern changes to the specific pattern and one identifying pattern displayed in a variable manner stops and displays as the specific pattern, the multiple identifying patterns become identifying patterns corresponding to each other in the specific pattern, resulting in the specific result, and the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification symbol is a specific symbol, and the special reach performance is started with an identification symbol other than the specific symbol as the reach symbol. Then, in the special reach performance, when an identification symbol other than the specific symbol becomes a reach symbol and a reach performance is performed, if one identification symbol in the variable display stops as a specific symbol, the reach symbol changes and is displayed again. Also, in the special reach performance, when a reach symbol changes to a specific symbol and a reach performance is performed, if one identification symbol in the variable display stops as a specific symbol, a specific result is reached and a special game is executed. As a result, depending on the reach symbol when the specific symbol stops, there are cases where the variable display is displayed again or where a specific result is achieved, making it possible to pattern the game performance and increase interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3,
The number of changes of the reach symbol in the special reach performance is a specific number or more, and the reach symbol becomes the specific symbol.

According to this type of gaming machine, when the number of times the reach symbol changes during the special reach performance exceeds a specific number, the reach symbol changes to a specific symbol. This allows the player to focus on the number of times the reach symbol changes when the special reach performance is executed, increasing the player's interest in the game.

When at least one of the three identification symbols is displayed as a confirmed identification symbol that does not match the others as a result of executing the special reach performance, it is determined that the game has failed, and the special game is not executed. In addition, in the special reach performance, when the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol, and the remaining identification symbol is displayed as the same identification symbol as the reach symbol, different benefits may be awarded in a case where the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol and the remaining identification symbol is displayed as the specific symbol when the reach symbol is a specific symbol. In addition, when the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol and the remaining identification symbol is displayed as the same identification symbol as the reach symbol, a first special benefit may be awarded, and when the reach symbol is a specific symbol and the remaining identification symbol is displayed as the specific symbol, a second special benefit may be awarded. In addition, the second special benefit may be more likely to be a benefit that is more profitable to the player than the first special benefit.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4,
In the special reach performance,
When the number of changes of the reach symbols is less than a specific number of times and the plurality of identification symbols are stopped and displayed as corresponding identification symbols, a first special benefit is awarded;
When the number of changes of the reach symbols is equal to or greater than the specific number of times and the plurality of identification symbols are stopped and displayed as corresponding identification symbols, a second special privilege is awarded.

According to such a gaming machine, in the special reach performance, if the number of reach pattern changes is less than a specific number and all of the multiple identification patterns are stopped and displayed as corresponding identification patterns, a first special benefit is awarded, and if the number of reach pattern changes is a specific number or more and all of the multiple identification patterns are stopped and displayed as corresponding identification patterns, a second special benefit is awarded. This makes it possible to draw attention to the number of reach pattern changes when the special reach performance is executed, and to increase interest in the game. Note that the first special benefit and the second special benefit may be special games with different obtainable game profits, or may be benefits with different game states after the special game ends, or may be different game benefits.

In addition, "in the special reach performance, if the number of times the reach pattern changes is less than a specific number and the three identification patterns are stopped and displayed as a matching pattern, a first special benefit is awarded, and if the number of times the reach pattern changes is equal to or greater than the specific number and the three identification patterns are stopped and displayed as a matching pattern, a second special benefit is awarded." Alternatively, the reach pattern (identification pattern) may have identification patterns of a plurality of display modes, and different special benefits may be awarded depending on which display mode of the reach pattern (identification pattern) is used when the reach pattern changes in the special reach performance and the identification pattern with the matching three identification patterns is stopped and displayed. For example, in a special reach performance, when the reach pattern is in the first display mode (red pattern) and three matching identification patterns are displayed, a first special benefit may be awarded; when the reach pattern is in the second display mode (blue pattern) and three matching identification patterns are displayed, a second special benefit may be awarded; and when the reach pattern is in the third display mode (black pattern) and three matching identification patterns are displayed, a third special benefit may be awarded.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5,
The second special benefit is characterized in that it is more likely to be a benefit to the player than the first special benefit.

With this type of gaming machine, the second special bonus is more likely to be a bonus that is more beneficial to the player than the first special bonus. With this type of gaming machine, when a special reach-to-win performance is executed, the player can hope that the number of reach-to-win symbol changes will reach a specific number of times or more, resulting in the execution of the second special bonus, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 6)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is as follows:
A discrimination symbol display means for variably displaying discrimination symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and for statically displaying a plurality of the discrimination symbols to form a static display mode;
A game performance execution means for executing a predetermined game performance;
A special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result,
A pattern array composed of a plurality of the identification patterns,
As the game performance, there is a reach performance in which one of the plurality of identification symbols is displayed in a variable manner and the other identification symbols are displayed in a reach pattern corresponding to each other,
The symbol arrangement is variably displayed as the one identification symbol variably displayed in the reach performance,
When the reach effect is executed,
Dividing the specific display area into a first display area and a second display area;
Among the identification symbols constituting the symbol array, identification symbols corresponding to the reach symbol are displayed in the first display area, and among the identification symbols constituting the symbol array, identification symbols not corresponding to the reach symbol are displayed in the second display area;
A predetermined game presentation is performed in the first display area and the second display area, and the identification pattern displayed in the display area which satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed as the single identification pattern in a stopped display mode, thereby forming the stopped display mode.

According to such a gaming machine, a reach effect is provided in which one of a plurality of identification symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining identification symbols are displayed as reach symbols that correspond to each other. When the reach effect is executed, a specific display area on the display screen is divided into a first display area and a second display area, and among the identification symbols that constitute the variable display pattern arrangement, the identification symbols that correspond to the reach symbol are displayed in the first display area, and the identification symbols that do not correspond to the reach symbol are displayed in the second display area. Then, a predetermined gaming effect is executed in the first display area (the identification symbols displayed in the first display area) and the second display area (the identification symbols displayed in the second display area), and the identification symbol selected from the display area that satisfies the predetermined condition is configured as the one identification symbol that is stopped and displayed last. As a result, when a predetermined gaming effect is executed in the first display area and the second display area in the reach effect, the player hopes that the first display area will satisfy the predetermined condition, which increases the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the new gaming effect increases the player's interest in the game.

The game may also include a variable ball entry port that can be changed between a ball entry state where the game ball can enter and a ball entry state where the game ball cannot enter, and a special game execution means that executes a special game that sets the variable ball entry port to a ball entry state when the result of the variable display of the identification pattern becomes a specific result. The reach effect may be an effect in which two of the three identification patterns are displayed as matching reach patterns, and the remaining one is displayed variably. The reach effect may be an effect in which two identification patterns are displayed as reach patterns of the corresponding (matching) identification patterns, and the remaining identification pattern is displayed variably as a pattern arrangement composed of multiple identification patterns. The game may also have a reach effect in which two identification patterns are displayed as matching identification patterns as reach patterns, and the remaining identification pattern is displayed variably as a predetermined pattern arrangement.

Note that "mutually corresponding identification patterns" refers to multiple identification patterns that are a combination of predetermined identification patterns, including cases where multiple identification patterns are a combination of the same identification pattern (e.g., "333" or "777"), and cases where multiple identification patterns are a combination of different predetermined identification patterns (e.g., "135", "268", "337", etc.).

If the first display area satisfies a predetermined condition, a gaming privilege (special game, advanced performance, etc.) is awarded, and if the second display area satisfies a predetermined condition, a loss occurs. In addition, a variable ball entry port that can be changed between a ball entry possible state where the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state where the game ball cannot enter may be provided, and a special game may be executed with the variable ball entry port in the ball entry possible state. In addition, the identification patterns that make up the pattern arrangement may include identification patterns that match the reach patterns that make up the reach mode, and identification patterns that do not match the reach patterns.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
The larger of the first and second display areas satisfies the predetermined condition.

With this type of gaming machine, a predetermined game presentation is performed in the first and second display areas, and the display area that becomes larger, i.e., the display area that occupies a large area in the specific display area, satisfies a predetermined condition. As a result, when a predetermined game presentation is performed in the first and second display areas in a reach presentation, the first display area is expected to become a large display area, which increases interest in the game. In addition, the new game presentation increases interest in the game.

The specific display area is divided into a first display area and a second display area, and as a result of the display area acquisition performance, the identification pattern displayed in the display area (first display area or second display area) that has acquired most of the specific display area becomes the stopping pattern (the only remaining identification pattern).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2,
A specific character is displayed in at least one of the first display area and the second display area, and a presentation is provided to assist the specific character in becoming a larger display area.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific character that performs an effect to assist in making the display area larger is displayed in at least one of the first and second display areas that perform a specific gaming effect. This allows the player to hope that the specific character displayed in the first display area will cause the first display area to satisfy a specific condition through the auxiliary effect of the specific character, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. In addition, the new gaming effect increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3,
The identification patterns constituting the pattern array include a plurality of specific patterns, and the plurality of specific patterns indicate common information and have different display modes;
In the reach performance, when the reach symbol is displayed as a predetermined specific symbol and the symbol arrangement is displayed in a variable manner,
A plurality of the specific patterns having different display modes are displayed in the first display area, and a discrimination pattern other than the specific pattern is displayed in the second display area,
When the first display area satisfies a predetermined condition, a special benefit is awarded in the game.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification symbols that make up the symbol array include a plurality of specific symbols. The plurality of specific symbols display common information (for example, the same numerical information) and have different display modes (for example, different colors). In addition, in a reach effect, when the reach symbol is displayed as a predetermined specific symbol and the symbol array is variably displayed as the remaining identification symbol, a plurality of specific symbols with different display modes are displayed in the first display area, and identification symbols other than the specific symbol are displayed in the second display area. In addition, when the first display area satisfies a predetermined condition, a gaming bonus is awarded regardless of which of the specific symbols in the first display area is stopped and displayed. This makes the player feel that there is a high possibility of receiving a bonus, increasing the interest in the game. Furthermore, the novel game effect increases the interest in the game.

The device may also have a bonus granting means for granting a specified bonus (special game, advanced performance). In the reach performance, when the reach pattern in which two identifying symbols match is a specific symbol, the number of identifying symbols displayed in the first display area is greater than when the reach pattern is an identifying symbol other than the specific symbol.

(Reference Invention 7)
In addition, the gaming machine of the reference invention 7-1 invention is,
An identification symbol display means for variably displaying an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a game performance execution means for executing a predetermined game performance on a display screen;
A special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result,
The game performance has a specific performance,
a moving display unit that moves in a predetermined direction on the display screen;
In the specific presentation, a display area change presentation can be executed in which the display mode of the display area on the display screen through which the moving display unit has passed is changed in response to the movement of the moving display unit.

Such a gaming machine has a moving display part that moves on the display screen, and when the moving display part moves in a specific presentation, a display area change presentation is executed in which the display mode of the display area on the display screen through which the moving display part has passed is changed. As a result, when the moving display part moves in a specific presentation, the display mode of the display area on the display screen changes in response to the movement of the moving display part, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
In the specific performance, a first execution mode in which the display area change performance is executed and a second execution mode in which the display area change performance is not executed,
The first execution mode is characterized in that the special game is more likely to be executed than the second execution mode.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific performance execution modes include a first execution mode in which a display area change performance is executed, and a second execution mode in which a display area change performance is not executed. The first execution mode is a gaming performance in which the execution of a special game is more likely than the second execution mode. This allows the player to increase their interest in the game in anticipation of the occurrence of a display area change performance when a specific performance is executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2,
The display mode of the movement display unit can be changed to a plurality of different colors,
the display state of a display area through which the movement display unit has passed can be changed to a different color corresponding to the color of the movement display unit;
When the display area change presentation is executed, the possibility of executing the special game differs depending on the changing color of the moving display section and the changing color of the display area through which the moving display section has passed.

According to this type of gaming machine, the moving display section has a plurality of colors (display modes) as its changing display mode, the display area has a plurality of colors (display modes) as its display mode that changes as the moving display section passes, and the color of the display area that changes as the moving display section passes is determined based on the color of the moving display section. Furthermore, when a display area change presentation is executed, the possibility of playing a special game differs depending on the color that the moving display section changes to and the color that the display area changes to. This allows the player to hope that when a display area change presentation is executed in a specific presentation, the moving display section will change to a color that indicates a higher possibility of playing a special game, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-3,
a movable member operable in a predetermined operating mode on the display screen;
The moving display unit is characterized by being formed of the movable member.

In this type of gaming machine, the moving display unit is a movable member that can move in a predetermined manner on the display screen. As the moving display unit is a movable member, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of a special effect. This also increases the player's anticipation of a special game when a special effect is executed and the movable member moves, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4,
The display area change presentation is characterized in that the display mode of the part of the display area on the display screen through which the moving display part has passed is changed successively in accordance with the movement of the moving display part.

With this type of gaming machine, the color change of the display mode of the display area on the display screen during the display area change presentation is executed sequentially in response to the movement of the moving display section on the display screen. This diversifies the change mode of the moving display section, and makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the display area change presentation. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 8)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is as follows:
a discrimination symbol display means for variably displaying a discrimination symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and for statically displaying the discrimination symbol;
A game performance execution means capable of executing a game performance;
and a special game execution means for executing a special game when the combination of the identification symbols displayed in a stopped state becomes a specific stop state.
The identification pattern includes a specific pattern and a non-specific pattern,
The game performance includes a first game performance and a second game performance having a different display mode from the first game performance,
The display screen of the identification pattern has a first stop position and a second stop position different from the first stop position,
The game performance execution means includes:
The device is characterized in that when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at a first stop position, the first game presentation is executed, and when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at a second stop position, a stop position development presentation is executed, which executes the second game presentation.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming presentation has a first gaming presentation and a second gaming presentation, and the identification symbols have a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol. Also, the identification symbols have a first stop position and a second stop position as their stop positions (stop display positions). Then, at a predetermined time during the variable display of the identification symbols, if the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first gaming presentation is executed, and if the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the stop position development presentation is executed to execute the second gaming presentation. This allows the player to focus on whether the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position or the second stop position during the variable display of the identification symbols, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, since the game presentation to be executed varies depending on the stop position of the specific symbol, it is possible to diversify the game presentation.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
When the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first game presentation is not executed, and when the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the second game presentation is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when a non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first gaming presentation is not executed, and when a non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the second gaming presentation is not executed. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the specific symbol or the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first or second stop position, increasing the player's interest in the game. In addition, the player will be excited by the expectation that the specific symbol will be stopped and displayed at the first or second stop position and the stop position development presentation will be executed, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
The game performance includes a first stage performance,
The device is characterized in that when the identification pattern is displayed stopped at the first stop position to execute the first game presentation and when the identification pattern is displayed stopped at the second stop position to execute the second game presentation, a common pre-stage presentation is executed, and the stop position development presentation is executed following the pre-stage presentation.

According to such a gaming machine, the game performance has a pre-stage performance. A common pre-stage performance is executed when the identification pattern (specific pattern) is stopped and displayed at the first stop position to execute the first game performance, and when the identification pattern (specific pattern) is stopped and displayed at the second stop position to execute the second game performance. Following the execution of the pre-stage performance, a stop position development performance is executed. As a result, at the pre-stage performance stage, it is not possible to know whether the identification pattern is stopped and displayed at the first stop position to execute the first game performance, or the identification pattern (specific pattern) is stopped and displayed at the second stop position to execute the second game performance, and the player is directed to pay attention to the stop position at which the identification pattern (specific pattern) is stopped and displayed, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-3,
The first game presentation and the second game presentation are game presentations indicating the possibility of executing the special game,
The first game presentation is characterized by indicating a higher possibility of executing the special game than the second game presentation.

According to such a gaming machine, the first game presentation and the second game presentation are both game presentations that indicate the possibility of executing a special game, and the first game presentation indicates a higher possibility of executing a special game than the second game presentation. This draws attention to the stopping position at which the identification pattern (specific pattern) will be displayed, and the player increases his/her interest in the game in the hope that the identification pattern will be displayed at the first stopping position where the first game presentation is executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is as follows:
a discrimination symbol display means for variably displaying a discrimination symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and for statically displaying the discrimination symbol;
A game performance execution means capable of executing a game performance;
and a special game execution means for executing a special game when the combination of the identification symbols displayed in a stopped state becomes a specific stop state.
The identification pattern has a specific pattern,
The game performance includes a first game performance and a second game performance having a different display mode from the first game performance,
The display screen of the identification pattern has a first stop position and a second stop position different from the first stop position,
The game performance execution means includes:
The device is characterized in that when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at a first stop position, the first game presentation is executed, and when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at a second stop position, a stop position development presentation is executed to execute the second game presentation.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming presentation has a first gaming presentation and a second gaming presentation, and the identification pattern has a specific pattern. Also, the identification pattern has a first stop position and a second stop position as stop positions (stop display positions). Then, at a predetermined time during the variable display of the identification pattern, when the specific pattern is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first gaming presentation is executed, and when the specific pattern is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the stop position development presentation is executed to execute the second gaming presentation. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the specific pattern is stopped and displayed at the first stop position or the second stop position during the variable display of the identification pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, since the game presentation to be executed varies depending on the stop position of the specific pattern, it is possible to diversify the game presentation.

(Reference Invention 9)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is as follows:
a discrimination symbol display means for displaying a discrimination symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and displaying a plurality of the discrimination symbols in a stopped state in a predetermined order;
A game performance execution means capable of executing a game performance;
A special game execution means for executing a special game when the stop display mode of the plurality of identification symbols becomes a specific stop display mode,
The game performance includes a plurality of game performances having different display modes,
The stop order of the identification symbols includes a first stop order and a second stop order different from the first stop order,
The game performance execution means includes:
The present invention is characterized in that different game presentations are executed when the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in the first stop order and when the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in the second stop order.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming presentation has a plurality of gaming presentations with different display modes, and the stopping order (stop display order) of the identification patterns is a first stop order and a second stop order. Then, different gaming presentations are executed when the identification patterns are stopped and displayed in the first stop order and when they are stopped and displayed in the second stop order. This makes it possible to draw attention to the stopping order of the identification patterns while the identification patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game. Also, since the gaming presentations executed differ depending on the stopping order of the specified identification patterns, it is possible to diversify the gaming presentations.

The game presentation may also have a first game presentation and a second game presentation having a different display mode from the first game presentation, and at a predetermined time during the variable display of the identification symbols, the first game presentation is executed when the predetermined identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a first stop order, and the second game presentation is executed when the predetermined identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a second stop order. Here, "different stop orders" may mean, for example, when three identification symbols, left, center, and right, are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, (1) a stop order pattern in which the symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left → center → right, (2) a stop order pattern in which the symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left → right → center, (3) a stop order pattern in which the symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of right → center → left, and (4) a stop order pattern in which the symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of center → left → right. In other words, there are multiple stop order patterns, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in any of the stop order patterns (stop orders).

In addition, when the three identification symbols (left, center, and right) are displayed in a predetermined order, the stop order of the first stop symbol may be different. For example, there may be (1) a stop order pattern in which the left identification symbol (first identification symbol) is displayed first, (2) a stop order pattern in which the center identification symbol (second identification symbol) is displayed first, and (3) a stop order pattern in which the right identification symbol (third identification symbol) is displayed first. In this way, a stop order pattern in which at least some of the stop orders of the identification symbols are different is referred to as "different stop orders of identification symbols."

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
The identification pattern includes a specific pattern and a non-specific pattern,
A different game presentation is executed when the specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the first stop order and when the specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the second stop order;
The device is characterized in that no different game presentation is executed when the non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the first stop order and when the non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the second stop order.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification symbols include specific symbols and non-specific symbols. Different game presentations are executed when the specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the first stop order and when they are stopped and displayed in the second stop order. Also, different game presentations are not executed when the non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed at the first stop position and when the non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed at the second stop position. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the specific symbol or the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position or the second stop position, increasing the player's interest in the game. Also, the player is excited by the expectation that the specific symbol will be stopped and displayed at the first stop position or the second stop position and a stop position development presentation will be executed, increasing the player's interest in the game.

A game presentation in which a first game presentation is executed when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in a first stop order, and a second game presentation is executed when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in a second stop order, is called a "stop order development presentation." This allows the player to pay attention to whether a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the first or second stop order, increasing the player's interest in the game. In addition, the player will be excited at the prospect of a specific symbol being stopped and displayed in the first or second stop order, which will result in the stop order development presentation being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2,
The game performance includes a first stage performance,
The device is characterized in that a common pre-stage performance is executed when the identification pattern is stopped and displayed in the first stop order and when the identification pattern is stopped and displayed in the second stop order, and a game performance based on the stop order is executed following the pre-stage performance.

According to such a gaming machine, a pre-stage performance is provided as a gaming performance. A common pre-stage performance is executed when the identification symbols (specific symbols) are stopped and displayed in the first stop order and when the identification symbols (specific symbols) are stopped and displayed in the second stop order, and a gaming performance based on the stop order is executed following the execution of the pre-stage performance. As a result, at the pre-stage performance stage, it is not possible to know whether the identification symbols (specific symbols) are stopped and displayed in the first stop order or the second stop order, and the player is directed to the stop order in which the identification symbols (specific symbols) are stopped and displayed, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 to Reference Invention 9-3,
The different game effects executed based on the first stop order and the second stop order are game effects indicating the possibility of executing the special game,
The different game presentations are characterized by showing different possibilities for the execution of the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the different game presentations executed based on the first stop order and the second stop order are both game presentations indicating the possibility of playing a special game, and these game presentations in different display modes indicate different possibilities for playing a special game. This draws attention to the stop order in which the identification pattern (specific pattern) will be stopped, and the player increases his or her interest in the game in the hope that the identification pattern (specific pattern) will be stopped in the stop order that will execute a game presentation indicating a higher possibility of playing a special game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
A first identification symbol, a second identification symbol, and a third identification symbol are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, and a combination of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol constitutes a stopped display mode;
The present invention is characterized in that different game effects can be executed depending on which of the first identification pattern, the second identification pattern, and the third identification pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific order.

According to this gaming machine, the three identification symbols, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol, are stopped and displayed in a predetermined stopping order, and the combination of the three identification symbols, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol, constitutes a stopped display mode. Furthermore, when this stopped display mode becomes a specific stopped display mode, a special game is executed. Then, a different game presentation is executed based on which of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order. This draws attention to the stopping order of the three identification symbols, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol, and increases interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-5,
The specific rank is characterized in that it is first.

According to such a gaming machine, different game presentations are executed based on which of the first, second, and third identification patterns stops and displays first. This draws attention to which of the three identification patterns, the first, second, and third identification patterns, stops and displays first, enhancing interest in the game.

As a game presentation, there is a special development presentation that is executed when the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in the first stop order or the second stop order,
When the specific symbols are stopped in the first or second stop order, a special development performance is executed.
It is also possible not to execute the special development performance when the non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the first stop order or the second stop order.

As a game performance, there are a plurality of game performances having different display modes,
The stopping order of the identification symbols is a plurality of different stopping orders,
The game presentation execution means is characterized in that it is capable of executing different game presentations depending on the stopping order in which the identification symbols are stopped and displayed.
In addition, the game presentation may include a first game presentation and a second game presentation having a display mode different from that of the first game presentation.

(Reference Invention 10)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is
a discrimination symbol display means for variably displaying discrimination symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and for displaying a plurality of said discrimination symbols in a stopped display mode at a predetermined stopped display position;
A game performance execution means for executing a predetermined game performance;
A special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result,
The game presentation has a pseudo-variable presentation capable of executing a pseudo-variable display multiple times by temporarily displaying the identification pattern and then displaying it again during the period from when the identification pattern starts to vary to when the stop display is confirmed,
The identification pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variable performance is set as the identification pattern constituting the stop display mode,
The distinguishing pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo-fluctuation performance is set to a different stop display position depending on which pseudo-fluctuation display in the pseudo-fluctuation performance the distinguishing pattern is temporarily displayed in.

According to this type of game, the game presentation has a pseudo-variation presentation in which the identification pattern is temporarily stopped during one period of the variation display in which the identification pattern starts to vary and is displayed as a fixed stop, and then varies again, thereby executing a pseudo-variation display multiple times. In addition, in this pseudo-variation presentation, a presentation is performed in which the identification pattern temporarily stopped is one of the identification patterns constituting the stop display mode. Then, depending on which pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation presentation the identification pattern temporarily stopped is, the identification pattern is set to a different stop display position in the stop display mode. This draws attention to which identification pattern is temporarily stopped in which pseudo-variation presentation, increasing interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to increase interest in the game by using new game presentations.

Also, a discrimination symbol display means for variably displaying discrimination symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and for displaying a plurality of the discrimination symbols at predetermined stopped display positions to form a stopped display mode;
A game performance execution means for executing a predetermined game performance;
A special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result,
The game presentation has a pseudo-variable presentation in which the identification symbols are temporarily displayed in a stopped state and then displayed again in a changed state during a period from when the identification symbols start to be displayed in a changed state until the stopped display is confirmed,
The identification pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variable performance is set as the identification pattern constituting the stop display mode,
The identification pattern temporarily displayed in a stopped state may be displayed at a different stop display position depending on the time in the pseudo-variable performance when the identification pattern temporarily displayed in a stopped state is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1,
A first identification symbol, a second identification symbol, and a third identification symbol are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, and a combination of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol constitutes a stopped display mode;
The identification pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-fluctuation performance is set to any one of the first identification pattern, the second identification pattern, and the third identification pattern, depending on which pseudo-fluctuation display in the pseudo-fluctuation performance the identification pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in.

According to such a gaming machine, the first, second, and third identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, and the combination of the first, second, and third identification symbols constitutes a stop display mode. Furthermore, when this stop display mode becomes a specific stop display mode, a special game is executed. Then, the identification symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation performance is set to one of the first, second, and third identification symbols depending on which pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation performance the identification symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in. This allows the player to pay attention to which identification symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in which pseudo-variation performance, increasing the interest in the game. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by using new game performances.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2,
The identification pattern includes a specific pattern and a non-specific pattern,
The pseudo-variable performance is to execute a pseudo-variable display multiple times by temporarily stopping and then displaying the specific symbol again,
The specific symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variable performance is set as the identification symbol constituting the stop display mode,
The specific symbol provisionally stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation performance is characterized in that the identification symbol is displayed at a different stop display position depending on the number of pseudo-variation displays in the pseudo-variation performance in which the specific symbol provisionally stopped and displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification symbols include specific symbols and non-specific symbols. In addition, the pseudo-variation performance executes multiple pseudo-variation displays by displaying the specific symbols in a variable manner after they are temporarily stopped. In addition, in this pseudo-variation performance, a performance is performed in which the temporarily stopped specific symbol is one of the identification symbols constituting the stopped display mode. Then, depending on which pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation performance the specific symbol temporarily stopped is displayed in, the identification symbol is set to a different stopped display position in the stopped display mode. This draws attention to which pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation performance the specific symbol is temporarily stopped, increasing interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to increase interest in the game by using new game performance.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3,
When the identification pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation performance is the non-specific pattern, the identification pattern is not set to a different stop display position depending on the number of pseudo-variation displays in the pseudo-variation performance in which the non-specific pattern temporarily stopped and displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, if the identification pattern tentatively displayed in the pseudo-variation performance is a non-specific pattern, the stop display position is not changed depending on which pseudo-variation performance the non-specific pattern was tentatively displayed in. This draws attention to which pseudo-variation performance the specific pattern is tentatively displayed in, increasing the interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 11)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 is
a discrimination symbol display means for displaying a discrimination symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and for displaying a plurality of said discrimination symbols in a static manner (in a predetermined order);
A game performance execution means capable of executing a game performance;
and a special game execution means for executing a special game when a stop display mode formed by a combination of a plurality of the identification symbols becomes a specific stop display mode.
The identification pattern includes a specific pattern and a non-specific pattern,
The game performance includes a plurality of game performances having different display modes,
When the plurality of identification symbols are stopped and displayed, different game effects are executed depending on which of the plurality of identification symbols is stopped and displayed as the specific symbol in a specific order.

Such a gaming machine has a plurality of gaming effects with different display modes. Also, the identification symbols include specific and non-specific symbols. Different gaming effects are executed depending on which of the multiple identification symbols constituting the stopped display modes is stopped as a specific pattern and in a specific order. This allows the player to pay attention to which identification pattern is stopped in a specific order and whether the identification pattern is stopped as a specific pattern during the changing display of the identification symbols, thereby increasing interest in the game. Also, since the game effects executed are different depending on the stopping mode of the identification symbols, it is possible to diversify the gaming effects.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1,
A first identification symbol, a second identification symbol, and a third identification symbol are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, and a combination of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol constitutes a stopped display mode;
The present invention is characterized in that different game effects can be executed depending on which of the first identification pattern, the second identification pattern, and the third identification pattern is stopped and displayed as the specific pattern in a specific order.

According to such a gaming machine, the first, second, and third identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, and a combination of the first, second, and third identification symbols constitutes a stop display mode. When this stop display mode becomes a specific stop display mode, a special game is executed. Then, depending on which of the first, second, and third identification symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific pattern and in a specific order, different game presentations are executed. For example, when the first identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order as a specific pattern, when the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order as a specific pattern, and when the third identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order, game presentations of different display modes are executed. This allows the player to pay attention to the stopping order of the three identification symbols, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol (which one stops and displays in a specific order) and whether the identification symbols stop and display as specific symbols, increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2,
The specific rank is characterized in that it is first.

According to such a gaming machine, different game presentations are executed based on which of the first, second, and third identification patterns stops and displays first. This draws attention to which of the three identification patterns, the first, second, and third identification patterns, is a specific pattern and stops and displays first, enhancing interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-3,
When the identification symbol displayed in the specific order is the non-specific symbol,
The present invention is characterized in that different game effects are not executed depending on which of the plurality of identification symbols is stopped and displayed in the specific order.

According to such a gaming machine, when the identification symbol displayed in the specific order is a non-specific symbol, different game effects are not executed depending on which of the plurality of identification symbols is displayed in the specific order. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the symbol displayed in the specific order is a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-4,
The game performance includes a first stage performance,
When different identification patterns among the plurality of identification patterns are the specific patterns and are stopped and displayed in the specific order, a common pre-stage performance is executed, and following the pre-stage performance, a game performance is executed based on the specific patterns being stopped and displayed in the specific order.

This type of gaming machine has a pre-stage performance as a gaming performance. A common pre-stage performance is executed when any of the multiple identification patterns constituting the stopped display mode is a specific pattern and is stopped and displayed in a specific order, and following the execution of the pre-stage performance, a gaming performance is executed based on which identification pattern is stopped and displayed in the specific order. As a result, at the pre-stage performance stage, it is not possible to recognize which identification pattern is stopped and displayed in the specific order (and as a specific pattern), so that attention is drawn to the stopping mode of the identification pattern, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-5,
A plurality of game effects that can be executed based on the specific symbols being stopped and displayed in the specific order are game effects that indicate the possibility of executing the special game,
The plurality of game effects are characterized in that they indicate different possibilities for the execution of the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, different game presentations are executed depending on which of the distinguishing patterns constituting the stopped display mode is the specific symbol stopped and displayed in a specific order, and all of these game presentations indicate the possibility of playing a special game, and the game presentations of these different display modes indicate different possibilities for playing a special game. This draws attention to which distinguishing pattern is the specific symbol stopped and displayed in a specific order, and the player increases his or her interest in the game in the hope that a game presentation indicating a higher possibility of playing a special game will be executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-7 is
a discrimination symbol display means for variably displaying discrimination symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and for statically displaying a plurality of said discrimination symbols;
A game performance execution means capable of executing a game performance;
and a special game execution means for executing a special game when a stop display mode formed by a combination of a plurality of the identification symbols becomes a specific stop display mode.
The identification pattern has a specific pattern,
The game performance includes a plurality of game performances having different display modes,
When the plurality of identification symbols are stopped and displayed, different game effects are executed depending on which of the plurality of identification symbols is stopped and displayed as the specific symbol in a specific order.

Such a gaming machine has a plurality of gaming effects with different display modes. Also, it has specific symbols as identification symbols. Then, different gaming effects are executed depending on which of the plurality of identification symbols constituting the stop display mode is stopped as a specific pattern and in a specific order. This makes it possible to draw attention to which identification pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific order and whether the identification pattern is stopped as a specific pattern during the variable display of the identification patterns, thereby increasing interest in the game. Also, since the executed gaming effects are different depending on the stopping mode of the identification patterns, it is possible to diversify the gaming effects.

The invention may be constructed by combining one or more of the above-mentioned reference inventions 1 to 11.

1 Pachinko game machine, 7b Performance pattern display area (performance pattern display section), 8 Performance pattern, 20 First start gate, 21 Second start gate, 30 First big prize gate, 35 Second big prize gate, 39 Specific area, 41a First special pattern display (first special pattern display section), 41b Second special pattern display (second special pattern display section), 80 Main control board (main control section), 90 Sub-control board (sub-control section), 100 Image control board (image control section), 103a Performance first special pattern hold display, 103b Performance second special pattern hold display

Claims (2)

A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbol arrangements each composed of a plurality of symbols, and for stopping and displaying symbols selected from the plurality of symbol arrangements in a predetermined stopping manner;
and a bonus awarding means for awarding a predetermined bonus when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific stopping mode.
The pattern array includes a plurality of specific patterns, and the plurality of specific patterns indicate common information and have different display modes;
As the specific stop mode,
A first specific stop mode in which a stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols, and the specific symbols constituting the stop mode are composed of the specific symbols of the same display mode;
A second specific stop mode in which a stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols, and at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode is composed of the specific symbols in a display mode different from the display mode of the other specific symbols,
A different benefit is awarded when the first specific stop mode is stopped and when the second specific stop mode is stopped,
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A game performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined game performance,
The game presentation includes a first game presentation and a second game presentation that suggests a higher possibility that the result of the hit/miss determination will be a hit than the first game presentation,
A second specific symbol not included in the symbol array is provided,
At a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display of the symbols, the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol, and the second game performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by: A game performance execution means is provided for executing a predetermined game performance,
As the game presentation,
A first stop effect indicating whether the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the first specific stop mode;
A second stop effect indicating whether the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the second specific stop mode;
A continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising:

Images